Nokia Solutions and Networks T5DJ1 SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS TLite

Contents

Users manual 1 of 2

Download: Nokia Solutions and Networks T5DJ1 SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Nokia Solutions and Networks T5DJ1 SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite
Document ID320001
Application IDX/leW7KsKv86xFOblLPwgQ==
Document DescriptionUsers manual 1 of 2
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize248.65kB (3108159 bits)
Date Submitted2003-04-22 00:00:00
Date Available2003-04-22 00:00:00
Creation Date2003-03-17 15:19:40
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2003-04-11 11:43:51
Document TitleTLite
Document Author: Win32 user

Technical
Information
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release R2.16.1.x
800 Mhz
CDMA
DRAFT
ENGLISH
Mar 2003
68P64115A18–1
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been
carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola
material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,
distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may
be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or
documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
DRAFT
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled
herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
 Copyright 2003 Motorola, Inc.
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV012501
DRAFT
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS
Optimization/ATP
Table of Contents
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Contents
FCC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 68 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
xviii
xviii
xix
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assumptions and Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
Purpose of the Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens During Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repaired Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
Required Test Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF computer and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-9
1-11
Required Documents and Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
1-13
1-13
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-14
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Assemblies and FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX–1X and BBX2 Interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-20
1-24
1-24
BTS Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-2
2-2
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Cell–site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF/NECF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet LAN Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-5
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power System Pre-power Application Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External AC Power Connection Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-9
Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Application and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
Power Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
Power Application – Normal Power–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Application Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Internal AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell-site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF/NECF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Packet BTS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Features and Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF File Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Installation and Update Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-13
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect the LMF to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
3-17
Using the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
iii
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Basic LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The LMF Display and the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical User Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding GUI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Line Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-25
3-26
3-29
3-31
3-32
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
3-33
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-43
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-44
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
Test Equipment Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
3-55
3-56
3-59
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Procedures Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-81
3-82
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is BLO Calibration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Verification During Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-84
3-84
3-84
iv
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-47
3-48
3-53
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Calibration and the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88
3-88
3-89
3-91
3-92
3-94
3-95
3-95
3-95
3-97
RFDS Set–up and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-98
3-98
3-98
3-99
3-102
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
3-106
3-108
Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Testing Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-109
3-109
3-109
3-109
3-110
3-110
3-110
Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
4-7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All–inclusive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX/RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-12
4-12
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
4-15
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
4-17
4-18
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4-20
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-22
4-23
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4-24
4-25
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
4-27
4-28
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
4-29
4-29
Chapter 5 Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Basic Troubleshooting: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Communications System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-3
6-6
6-7
6-7
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
6-11
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Every Test Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify BLO Checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single–Sided BLO Checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Faults Are Isolated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Passed Reduced ATP Tests but Has Forward Link Problem in Normal Operation . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-15
vi
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-15
6-16
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-19
6-19
6-19
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
Troubleshooting: RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Tests Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX Paths Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Tests Fail on a Single Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module LED Status (except GLI2, CSM, BBX, MCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
6-35
6-37
Appendix A Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-12
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
vii
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12
Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ...................................................................................
SCCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
A-13
A-13
A-14
Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information . . . . . . . .
B-1
PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix F Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B-2
B-2
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
D-1
D-2
D-2
E-1
E-2
E-2
E-2
E-3
E-5
E-5
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
F-2
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
Test Equipment Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8921A with PCS Interface Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8921A with PCS Interface System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-14
F-14
F-14
F-18
F-18
F-19
F-20
F-21
viii
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8932/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-22
F-22
F-23
F-24
Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Without the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-25
F-25
F-25
F-26
F-28
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
Using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-29
F-29
F-33
Appendix G Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Procedure – Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix H In–service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
G-2
H-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Stabilization and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1X Test Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
H-2
H-2
H-2
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8935 series E6380A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
H-3
H-3
H-6
H-9
H-12
H-15
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-18
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
ix
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 Combiners . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-4: DC PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T . . . . . . . . .
3-22
Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup –
CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –
CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-65
Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown –
CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-67
Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –
Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68
Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –
Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –
Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-70
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –
Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . .
3-79
Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
3-80
Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection Diagram
4-5
Figure 4-2: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Figure 4-3: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Figure 6-4: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
E-5
Figure F-1: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
Figure F-2: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-4
Figure F-3: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-5
Figure F-4: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Figure F-5: Agilent 8935 Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Figure F-6: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Figure F-7: R3465 Communications Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Figure F-8: HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-11
Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12
Figure F-10: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-13
Figure F-11: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference
F-15
Figure F-12: HP 8921A Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference . . . . . .
F-17
Figure F-13: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-20
Figure F-14: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
Figure F-15: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second Tick Connections . . . . .
F-22
Figure F-16: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-23
Figure F-17: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-24
Figure F-18: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-25
Figure F-19: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-26
Figure F-20: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-28
Figure F-21: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-32
Figure F-22: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-35
Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xi
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-10
Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-11
Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-13
Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-14
Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-17
Figure H-11: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-17
Figure H-12: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A, Advantest R3267, and Agilent 8935 with
Option 200 or R2K (IS–95A/B and 1X CDMA 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-19
Figure H-13: TX Calibration Test Setup – HP 8921A/600 w/PCS Interface (1.9 GHz),
HP 8921A/600 (800 MHz), and Advantest R3465 (IS–95A/B only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
H-20
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
List of Tables
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 2-9: DC Power Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Table 2-10: AC Power Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39
Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xiii
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-76
Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
Table 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
3-79
Table 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . .
3-80
xiv
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-81
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82
Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88
Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90
Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-92
Table 3-36: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-94
Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-96
Table 3-38: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-97
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-99
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-103
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-104
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-105
Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-106
Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-107
Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-108
Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-109
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-110
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-110
Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,
Inter–frame RX Cables Connected
(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,
Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected
(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 4-8: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
Table 4-9: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Table 4-10: Test Pilot Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
Table 4-11: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
Table 4-12: Test FER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Table 4-13: Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 5-6: Remove LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting a Signal Generator Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-10: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-17: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Table 6-18: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and Kit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Table 6-19: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-20: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-22: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-23: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Table 6-24: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Table 6-25: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Table 6-26: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
Table 6-27: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Table 6-28: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Table 6-29: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xv
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Table 6-30: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Table 6-31: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Table 6-32: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
Table A3b: General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) . . . .
A-9
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12
Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Table C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-5
Table F-1: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
Table F-2: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-4
Table F-3: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-5
Table F-4: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Table F-5: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Table F-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-11
Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12
Table F-10: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-14
Table F-11: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference
F-16
xvi
Table F-12: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-18
Table F-13: Pretest Setup for HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-18
Table F-14: Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
Table F-15: Advantest R3465 Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
Table F-16: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-22
Table F-17: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-25
Table F-18: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-26
Table F-19: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Table of Contents
68P64115A18–1
Table F-20: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-29
Table F-21: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-33
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-3
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-6
Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-9
Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-12
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-15
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-21
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xvii
FCC Requirements
68P64115A18–1
FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the
SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver
Stations.
FCC Part 15 Requirements
Part 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USER
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola
could void your authority to operate the equipment.
15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
S Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
S Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
S Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
xviii
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
FCC Requirements
68P64115A18–1
FCC Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible
with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company.
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices
Device
FCC Part 68 ID
Group Line Interface (GLI3) See Note
US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1X
Cisco Model 1900–27 Router
US: 5B1DDNDN0006
ADC KENTROX Model 537
US: F81USA–31217–DE–N
NOTE
The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3,
< US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1X>, and may be used in conjunction with
one or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered
CSU device not listed above.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that
you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please
contact:
Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)
1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632–5390
for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair
this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or
user-serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xix
Foreword
68P64115A18–1
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Obtaining Manuals
To view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit the
Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,
or contact your Motorola account representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing
date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a
different revision character.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The three categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can
use. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid
an undesirable situation or provides additional information
to help you understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment
damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous
situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.
The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of
software information:
S In text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style
without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to
name a command.
S In text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the
system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
S In command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those
parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and
typewriter style characters represent command output responses
as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
S In the command format of the command definition, typewriter
style characters represent the command parameters.
xx
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Foreword
68P64115A18–1
Reporting manual errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network
Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable
CNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):
– the document type
– the manual title, part number, and revision character
– the page number(s) with the error
– a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.
Contact us
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email
address below:
cdma.documentation@motorola.com
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.
Manual banner definitions
A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,
PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the
manual is not yet approved for general customer use.
24-hour support service
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please
contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediate
assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:
NA CNRC
EMEA CNRC
ASPAC CNRC
Japan & Korea CNRC
LAC CNRC
+1–800–433–5202
+44– (0) 1793–565444
+86–10–88417733
+81–3–5463–3550
+51–1–212–4020
For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account
representative.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xxi
General Safety
68P64115A18–1
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
NOTE
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations –
68P81150E62.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
S not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
S not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
S always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
xxii
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
General Safety
68P64115A18–1
Use caution when exposing or
handling the CRT
Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity
scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,
avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be
handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety
mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
Mar 2003
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
xxiii
Revision History
68P64115A18–1
Revision History
Manual Number
68P64115A18–1
Manual Title
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown
to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous
release of this publication.
Version
Level
Date of Issue
Mar 2003
xxiv
Remarks
Initial draft t
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout
68P64115A18–1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout
Manual Scope and Layout
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of the Motorola 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame. The
following subjects are addressed: preliminary background information;
optimization and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance Test Procedures
(ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; site turnover;
troubleshooting.
This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.
Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration, etc.) is
described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page
information “maps.”
Each “map” contains the information necessary to perform the test or
operation. Included are all required input levels, output levels, Local
Maintenance Facility (LMF) application software commands, and test
point identification. Also described are important test process concepts
and equipment operation which should be understood by the operator.
Whenever possible, graphics, flowcharts, or written examples
complement the information or procedural steps.
Assumptions and Prerequisites
This document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have been
installed per the 1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ,
68P64115A16 which covers both the physical “bolt down” of the
SC 3812T–Lite frame and the specific cabling configurations.
1-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout
68P64115A18–1
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas:
S Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before performing
optimization or tests.
S Preliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTS
sub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power to
the BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.
S Optimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloading
all BTS processor boards, test equipment set–up, RF path verification,
BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency
Diagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.
S Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,
executed by the LMF, and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and
receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This
chapter also covers generating an ATP report.
S Prepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP is
completed.
S Basic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when an
ATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,
test equipment operation, calibration, and Global Positioning System
(GPS) operation.
S Appendices include:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mar 2003
Data sheets for CFE’s recording at the site
Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset information
Optimization/ATP matrix
BBX Gain set point vs BTS output
CDMA operating frequency programming information
Manual test setup information
Downloading ROM and RAM code
In–service ATP procedures
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-3
Purpose of the Optimization
68P64115A18–1
Purpose of the Optimization
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:
S Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
S Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combined
losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-in
tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper site
operation.
What Happens During Optimization?
Overview – During optimization, the accumulated path loss or gain is
first determined for each RF transmit path in the BTS. These transmit
path loss or gain values are then stored in a database along with RF
receive path default values.
RF path definitions – For definitions of the BTS transmit (TX) and
receive (RX) paths, see “What is Bay Level Offset Calibration?” in the
Bay Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.
RF paths and transceiver optimization – Six of the seven Broad Band
Transceiver (BBX) boards in each CCP shelf are optimized to specific
RX and TX antenna connectors. The seventh BBX board acts in a
redundant capacity for BBX boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to all
antenna connectors. A single optimization value is generated for each
complete path. This eliminates the accumulation of error that would
occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of
each element in the path.
Using RF path gain/loss values – BTS equipment factors in the derived
optimization values internally to adjust transceiver power levels, leaving
only site–specific antenna feedline loss and antenna gain characteristics
to be factored in by the CFE when determining required site Effective
Radiated Power (ERP) output power levels.
1-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
When to Optimize
68P64115A18–1
When to Optimize
New Installations
The following operations and optimization/test actions should be
accomplished for a new BTS or frame installation:
1. After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation.
This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial
power–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation,
and verifying transmit and receive paths.
2. Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes
performance verification and calibration of all transmit and receive
RF paths, and download of accumulated calibration data.
3. A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any
time after optimization to verify BTS calibration.
4. After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test
Procedure (ATP) verification tests are performed to verify
alarm/redundancy performance.
5. After manual pre–ATP verification tests, an ATP is performed to
verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required to demonstrate
regulation compliance before the site can be placed in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is required after expansion of a site with additional BTS
frames.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
Refer to Appendix C for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
outlining the minimum tests that must be performed any time a BTS RF
subassembly or cable associated with an RF path is replaced.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-5
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
Required Test Equipment and Software
Overview
Test equipment and software described in this section is required for the
optimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdrivers
and frame keys are also needed. Read the owner’s manual for all of the
test equipment to understand its individual operation before using the
tool in the optimization.
Policy
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteria
should be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, of
course, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipment
meets the same technical specifications.
NOTE
During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models not supported by
the LMF, but those models must meet the same technical
specifications.
It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or
troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on–hand
and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service and calibration prior to BTS optimization. Follow the original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended maintenance and
calibration schedules closely.
Test Cable Calibration
Test cables can make critical differences in optimization accuracy. It is
recommended that cable calibration be run at every BTS with the
complete test equipment set. This method compensates for test cable
insertion loss within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for
test cable insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of
tests.
Another method to account for cable loss is by entering it into the LMF
during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test
cable characterization using shop test equipment. Characterized cables
should be tagged with the characterization information, and the
measured losses entered into the LMF before field optimization.
1-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
Equipment Warm–up
After arriving at a site, test equipment should be plugged in and turned
on immediately to provide the longest possible time for warm up and
stabilization. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up
for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to use for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration:
S Communications test set.
S Rubidium time base.
S Power meter.
LMF computer and software
LMF Hardware Requirements
An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or
better) is recommended:
S Notebook computer
S 266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor
S MSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000 operating
system
S 4 GB internal hard disk drive
S SVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768
(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to display
more than 265 colors
NOTE
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must be
maximized after it is displayed.
S Memory requirements:
– Minimum required RAM: 96 MB
– Recommended RAM:
–– 128 MB for Windows 98 SE
–– 256 MB for Windows 2000
Mar 2003
20X CD–ROM drive
3 1/2 inch floppy drive
56kbps V.90 modem
Serial port (COM 1)
Parallel port (LPT 1)
PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapter
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-7
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
LMF Software
The Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) application program is a
graphical user interface (GUI)–based software tool. This product is
specifically designed to provide cellular communications field personnel
with the capability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver
Station (BTS) operations:
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
Ethernet LAN Transceiver
S PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter
3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589B
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter
S Transition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2
Converter (or equivalent)
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be used to
interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.
Ethernet LAN External In/Out Port Adapter
Trompeter Electronics, Inc., ADBJ20–E1–PL75 or equivalent BNC (F)
to TRB (M) adapter is required if it is necessary to connect the LMF
computer to the LAN external interface triaxial connectors located in the
power entry compartment.
RS–232 to GPIB interface
S National Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the LMF to the test
equipment.
S A standard RS–232 cable can be used with the modifications shown in
Figure 1-1.
NOTE
Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others
as it is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output
signal. The other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on
each cable end.
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail
9–PIN D–FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
1-8
9–PIN D–FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 1, 4, 6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
GND
TX
RX
RTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
Mar 2003
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
Model SLN2006A MMI interface kit
S Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can be used for
25–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.
S Motorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interface
the LMF computer serial port connection to the Group Line Interface
(GLI), Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM), External Trunked
Interface Board (ETIB), and module debug serial ports.
Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table
Item
Description
Test Capability
Test Sets
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 8921A (with 83203B)
Communications analyzer (includes 83203B
CDMA interface option)
IS–95A/B only
Motorola CyberTest
Communications analyzer
IS–95A/B only
Advantest R3465 (with 3561L)
Communications analyzer (with 3561 CDMA
option)
IS–95A/B only
Agilent E4406A (with E4432B)
Communications analyzer (with Generator)
IS–95A/B and
CDMA 2000 testing
Advantest R3267 Analyzer (with
R3562)
Communciations Analyzer with Advantest
R3562 Generator
IS–95A/B and
CDMA 2000 testing
Agilent 8935 series E6380A
(formerly HP 8935) with option
200 or R2K
Communications test set
IS–95A/B and
CDMA 2000 testing
Power Meters
Gigatronix 8541C
Power meter
HP437B (with HP8481A sensor)
Power meter with sensor – capable of measuring –30 dBm to 20 dBm
A combination of test equipment supported by the LMF may also be
used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion
of BTS equipment when the communications system analyzer does not
perform all of the following functions:
S Frequency counter
S Deviation meter
S RF power meter (average and code domain)
S RF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation)
S Audio signal generator
S AC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and high
impedance input mode)
S Noise measurement meter
S C–Message filter
S Spectrum analyzer
S CDMA code domain analyzer
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-9
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
GPIB cables
Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used to
interconnect test equipment and LMF computer.
Timing reference cables
S Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; right
angle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. long
are required to interconnect the communications system analyzer to
SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references
or
S Two BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,
used to interconnect the communications system analyzer to
SGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timing
references in the RF Modem Frame
Digital multimeter
Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.
Directional coupler
Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model
375BN–M loads, or equivalent.
RF attenuators
S 20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunction
with calibration of test cables or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
S 10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibration
with a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.
Clamp–on DC current probe
Amprobe CT600, or equivalent, 600 A capability with jaw size which
accommodates 2/0 cable. Used with the DMM for back–up battery
charging testing.
Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.
As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for various
test setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) for
calibration and (1) RF short.
RF load
100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RF
loading during BTS transmit tests.
High–impedance conductive wrist strap
Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD when
handling or working with modules.
1-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
Driver bit for tamper–resistant fasteners
Star fastener tamper–resistant insert bit set, Grainger 5F530 or
equivalent, to remove tamper–resistant fasteners securing the frame rear
access cover.
Optional Equipment
This section provides a list of additional equipment that might be
required during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.
NOTE
Not all optional equipment specified in this section will be
supported by the LMF in automated tests.
Duplexer
Filtronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used during
Spectral Purity Receive band noise tests.
Frequency counter
Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum analyzer
Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive band
spectral purity tests performed by the LMF.
LAN tester
Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span line (T1/E1) verification equipment
As required for the local application.
RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)
Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTS
transmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
Oscilloscope
Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,
timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.
2–way splitter
Mini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide the
diversity receive input to the BTS.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-11
Required Test Equipment and Software
68P64115A18–1
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone
Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to provide
test transmission and reception during BTS maintenance and
troubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not feature
special test modes. Two radios will be required for system and
drive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.
RF circulator
Circulator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute for
a duplexer during Receive sensitivity Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing
in conjunction with Safco CDMA mobile.
High stability 10 MHz rubidium standard
Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM and
Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)/High Stability Oscillator (HSO)
frequency verification.
1-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Required Documents and Related Publications
68P64115A18–1
Required Documents and Related Publications
Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
S Site Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which
includes:
– General site information
– Floor plan
– RF power levels
– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)
– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)
– Board placement
– Site wiring list
– CDF or NECF files (bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf and
cbsc–#.necf)
S Demarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)
S Equipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment
Related Publications
Additional, detailed information about the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS and its components is
included in the following publications:
Mar 2003
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide; 68P64114A51
LMF Help function on–line documentation
LMF CLI Reference; 68P09253A56
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93
1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ; 68P64115A16
1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS FRU Guide ; 68P64115A17
SC4812T/T–Lite/ET/ET Lite Troubleshooting; 68P09253A65
Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-13
Terms and Abbreviations
68P64115A18–1
Terms and Abbreviations
Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations
Standard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined in
Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Any
non–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed in
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or
Abbreviation
Definition
1X
One of two bandwidths currently defined in the IS–2000 CDMA specification, which
extends the capability of the IS–95A and B specifications. 1X bandwidth provides
wireless packet voice and data transmission capability at up to 144 Mbps.
BBX–1X
Broad Band Transceiver, 1X. Third generation BBX card with CDMA2000 1X packet as
well as IS–95A/B capability.
BBX2
Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports IS–95A/B
BBXR
Redundant BBX for a CCP shelf or cage.
CCD
Clock Combining and Distribution. CCP shelf module which accepts timing signals from
the active source and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules.
CIO
Combiner Input/Output
companion frame
A BTS frame configured to operate at the same site with another companion frame.
Companion frames may share antenna signals, but are not inter–connected on the same
LAN. Companion frames are managed as separate BTSs in the Base Station System
(BSS).
DBPF
DBM
Dual Bandpass Filter
Debug Monitor
DLM
DownLoad Manager. Software application resident on the GLI card which permits
download of software upgrades from the Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC) to
BTSs without the need for a site visit.
DMAC
Digital Metering, Alarm, Control. Part of the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) which provides
control of and status information for the AC power rectifiers as well as back–up battery
monitoring and test capability. Term is used interchangeably with MAP (see below).
DPLL
Digital Phase–Locked Loop
DRDC
Duplexer, Receive Filter, Dual Directional Coupler. Provides duplexing of BTS transmit
and receive signals to a single antenna and antenna signal sampling in either the forward
(transmit) or reflected (receive) direction for use by an RF Diagnostic Subsystem
(RFDS).
EMPC
Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS expansion frame MPC module which is
used to receive, amplify, and distribute RX signals from the starter frame MPC.
GLI2
Group Line Interface card, second generation
HSO
High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS when the
timing signal from the GPS or Remote GPS module is unavailable.
HSO2
HSO card, second generation
. . . continued on next page
1-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Terms and Abbreviations
68P64115A18–1
Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or
Abbreviation
Definition
HSOX
HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with the starter
frame HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frame CSM
modules.
ISC
In–Service Calibration. Technique for performing calibration sector by sector on a BTS
to avoid completely removing the site from service.
LPAC
Linear Power Amplifier Controller
LFR2
Low Frequency Receiver, second generation. Low–cost LFR card with capability to
distribute synchronization signals to multiple RF modem frames.
MAP
Meter Alarm Panel. SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) which contains the
functions of both the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) and the DMAC. Term is
used interchangeably with DMAC.
MCC8E
Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 8 IS–95A/B channels.
MCC24E
Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 24 IS–95A/B channels.
MCC–1X
Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 16 or 48 CDMA2000 1X or (with Software
Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher) IS–95A/B channels.
MPC
Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS CCP shelf module used to amplify and distribute
RX signals to BBX modules.
NECB
NECF
NECJ
Network Element Configuration Baseline
Network Element Configuration File
Network Element Configuration Journal
OLF
Object List File. File containing a list of the ROM and RAM code versions which should
be operating on every device installed in a BTS. The file is resident on the Central Base
Station Controller (CBSC) Mobility Manager (MM) and is passed to the GLI after a
DLM job is invoked. The GLI uses the OLF to determine which devices require code
download to meet the OLF–specified version.
PDA
Power Distribution Assembly. Assembly in an SC4812ET Lite BTS providing internal
DC power distribution and circuit protection.
RFMF
RF Modem Frame
RGD
Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) Distribution. Module which provides
distribution of digital timing information to up to four BTS RF modem frames (RFMFs)
from a single Remote GPS receiver.
RGPS
Remote Global Positioning System. GPS receiver and signal distribution subsystem
which provides digital timing information for up to four BTS RFMFs at a cell site.
RGPS expansion
primary frame
BTS frame where the RGD is located and which serves as the distribution point for
RGPS digital timing signals to other (secondary) BTS frames at a cell site.
RGPS expansion
secondary frame
BTS frame which receives RGPS digital timing signals distributed from the primary
RGPS expansion frame at a cell site.
RHSO
Remote High–Stability Oscillator. Subsystem which generates and distributes
synchronization signals from a single HSO to up to four RF modem frames.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-15
Terms and Abbreviations
68P64115A18–1
Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or
Abbreviation
Definition
SCCP
Small CDMA Channel Processor. The type of CCP shelf used in the SC4812ET Lite
BTS.
TCP
Temperature Compensation Panel. A function of the SC4812ET Lite MAP which
provides the capability to adjust DC voltage output of the rectifiers to compensate for
variations resulting from temperature changes.
TRDC
Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (Non–duplexed, Receive Filter). TRDCs
contains separate transmit and receive paths and bandpass filters which are not connected
electrically. Transmit and receive antenna signals are not duplexed and must be handled
by separate antennas. Each RF path contains a dual directional coupler on the antenna
port which allows sampling of antenna signals in the forward (transmit) and reflected
(receive) directions for use by an RFDS.
1-16
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
BTS Equipment Identification
Equipment Overview
The 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame consists of a single cabinet
containing RF and power amplifier components. The BTS may be
powered powered by:
S 220 Vac (rectified internally to +27 Vdc)
S –48 Vdc (power converted internally to +27Vdc)
S +27 Vdc
Each frame can support up to two carriers in a 3–sector configuration.
Six–sector operation is not supported with any SC4812T Lite
configuration.
Figure 1-2 illustrates the external features of the BTS frame, the single
major component of the Motorola SC4812T Lite. The frame cabinet is
identical for starter and expansion frames except for the I/O interconnect
plate.
Frame Configurations
The SC4812T Lite is available in starter and expansion frame
configurations. Following are brief descriptions of each.
Starter frame configuration supports one or two carriers, each with
separate antenna sets. It can operate as a stand–alone BTS, or can be
modified in the field to the expansion frame configuration.
Expansion Frame configuration supports one or two carriers using 2:1
TX combiners and a single antenna set for the frame. It operates with an
SC4812T Lite starter frame which has its own antennas and different
carriers. Expansion frames share RX signals to provide diversity RX for
the opposite frame. Expansion frames allow equipping a single SC4812T
Lite site with up to four carriers.
Logical BTS
The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, all
BTS frames co–located at a single site had to be identified in the
network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTS
feature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with unique
Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single
(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to four
SC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical
BTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up the
logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF/NECF file that includes
equipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices
and a CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTS
frames.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-17
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Logical BTS Numbering
The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1).
Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, –101, –201,
and –301 (e. g. BTS–812–201). When you log into a BTS, a FRAME
tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,
there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1) for BTS–282. If a logical
BTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for each
frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, FRAME–438–101, and FRAME–438–201
for a BTS–438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in the
CDF/NECF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) is displayed.
Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or
more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for
information on how to select devices.
SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 and Figure 1-4 for specific device ID numbers.
Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Frame
Power
(PS–1)
Power
(PS–2)
AMR–1
GLI2–1
BBX–R
(Optional)
MPC/
EMPC–1
–
–
R1
–
101
–
–
101
101
101
102
101
102
103
R101
–
201
–
–
201
201
201
202
201
202
203
R201
–
301
–
–
301
301
301
302
301
302
303
R301
–
MCC
BBX
Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Frame
HSO/
LFR
–
–
–
101
–
101
102
–
201
–
201
202
301
–
301
302
1-18
CSM –1 CSM –2 CCD A
CCD B
SW
MPC/
EMPC–2
–
–
105
106
–
–
204
205
206
–
–
304
305
306
–
–
AMR–2
GLI2–2
MCC
BBX
–
–
–
102
102
103
104
104
–
–
–
202
202
203
204
–
–
–
302
302
303
304
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS Frame
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
I/O Interconnect
Plate
Fan Module
SCCP
Power Supply
Modules
Breaker
Panel
Power
Amplifiers
For clarity, doors are not shown.
ti-CDMA-WP-00213-v01-ildoc-ftw
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-19
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Internal Assemblies and FRUs
The BTS frame houses the fan modules, Small CDMA Channel
Processor (SCCP) shelf, RF Power Amplifier modules, PA trunking
modules, 2:1 combiners.
RF filtering includes: DRF – Duplexers with TX Filter, RX Filter, and
Diversity RX Filter and TRF – Non-Duplexed TX Filter, RX Filter, and
Diversity RX Filter.
Power system components include an AC Power Input/Filter, DC Filters,
+27 Vdc Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).
Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 show the location of the internal assemblies
and Field Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is
found in the following paragraphs.
Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect Plate
ALARM
CONNECTORS
RF FILTERING
REAR
SPAN I/O
SITE I/O
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
FILLER PLATE
POWER INPUT/
DC FILTER
POWER INPUT/
AC FILTER
EXP FILLER
PLATE
HSO/LFR
GPS IN
LAN
CONNECTIONS
FRONT
ETHERNET ROUTER (IF USED;
OTHERWISE, FILLER PLATE)
ti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw
DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)
Both rectifier output voltage and back–up battery voltage are routed to
the PDA (Figure 1-3) where they are combined into system DC bus
voltage. The PDA provides distribution of DC power and system DC
bus protection from the loads with MAIN BREAKER and the smaller
post–distribution circuit breakers. MAIN BREAKER permits removal of
all frame loading from the bus. The 13 post–distribution circuit breakers
permit removal of individual loads.
1-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1
Combiners)
The filter/combiner shelf (Figure 1-3) holds the transmit bandpass filters
or 2:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.
Span I/O Board
The span I/O board (Figure 1-3) provides the span line interface to the
SCCP backplane.
Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) Shelf
The SCCP shelf has provisions for the following types and quantities of
modules (Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4):
S Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)
S Broad Band Transceiver, second generation or 1X, (BBX2 or
BBX–1X) cards, primary (6)
S BBX2 or BBX–1X card, redundant (1)
S CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)
S Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on two cards (one with GPS
receiver, if ordered)
Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card (1)
Fan modules (2)
Filler panel (as required)
Group Line Interface, second generation, (GLI2) cards (2)
High Stability Oscillator (HSO)/Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) card
(Optional) (1)
S Multi–coupler Preselector Cards (MPC) (2 per starter frame; 1 per
companion frame)
S Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card (EMPC) (1 per companion
frame)
S Multi–Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E, or MCC–1X) cards (4)
S Power supply cards (2)
S Switch card (1)
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-21
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf
SC 4812T Lite Cabinet
MPC/EMPC
MPC/EMPC
CCD–2
CSM
CSM
HSO
CIO
BBX
BBX
BBX
BBX
BBX
BBX
SWITCH
MCC
MCC
BBX
GLI
MCC
MCC
AMR
GLI
AMR
Power Supply
CCD–1
Power Supply
19mm Filler Panel
SCCP SHELF
CCD CARD(S)
(LOCATED BEHIND FILLER PANEL)
FILLER
HSO/LFR
POWER 1
CSM 1
AMR
CCD
POWER 2
CSM 2
GLI
MCC
R1
SWITCH
BBX
MPC
ti-CDMA-WP-00222-v01-ildoc-ftw REF
2:1 Combiners
In the SC4812T Lite BTS, one 2:1 combiner is used per sector to
combine the trunked LPA–amplified TX signals for two carriers into one
signal for input to the applicable sector DRDC or TRDC.
1-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
Transmit & receive, non–duplexed, Receive filter, Dual
Directional Coupler (TRF)
TRFs provide separate, bandpass–filtered sector transmit and receive
paths. When TRFs are used, separate transmit and receive antennas are
required for each sector. As with DRFs, dual directional couplers for
each antenna path are incorporated in TRFs to permit signal monitoring
by the RFDS.
Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF Details
ANT
CPLD
RX
TX
BTS
CPLD
DRF
RX ANT
CPLD
RX BTS
CPLD
RX
TX ANT
CPLD
TX
DUPLEXED
TX & RX ANTENNA
TX BTS
CPLD
TRF
RX
ANTENNA
SC4812ETL0005–4
TX
ANTENNA
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-23
BTS Equipment Identification
68P64115A18–1
SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices
SC 4812T Lite frames have one SCCP cage which will support up to
four MCC cards and six BBX cards.
MCC Cards
A BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC–8E, MCC–24E, and
MCC–1X cards. Any SCCP cage MCC card slot will support any of the
three MCC types. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC card
must be an MCC–1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot. In a
BSS operating with Software Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher, MCC–1X
cards will support IS–95A and B traffic as well as CDMA2000 1X.
When operating with Software Release 2.16.0.5x.x, the MCC–1X cards
do not support IS–95A/B operation. For additional software release
compatibility and capability information, contact the local Motorola
account team.
BBX Cards
Up to six BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX–1Xs can also be
supported. SCCP cage BBX2 card slots 1 through 6 are carrier– and
sector–dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors for
one carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer to
Table 1-6 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations.
The SCCP cage R1 card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. This
slot will support either a BBX2 or a BBX–1X. If a cage has BBX–1X
carriers, the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX–1X card to provide
1X redundancy.
BBX–1X and BBX2 Interchangeability
In a BSS operating with R16.0 software, BBX–1X cards can be used as
direct replacements for BBX2 cards; however, different types of BBXs
should not be mixed on the same carrier. Therefore, if a BBX2 card is
replaced with a BBX–1X, all remaining BBX2 cards for the carrier
supported by the replaced card must also be replaced with BBX–1X
cards.
1-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Sector Configurations
68P64115A18–1
BTS Sector Configurations
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5
outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also see
Table 1-6, Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7. Bandpass filters are used for
single–carrier configurations and two–carrier systems when carriers are
either adjacent or not adjacent
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration
Number of
Carriers
Number
of Sectors
N/A
Bandpass Filter or 2:1 Combiner
Adjacent or Non–adjacent
Bandpass Filter
Non–adjacent
2:1 Combiner
Channel Spacing
Filter Requirements
The matrix in Table 1-6 shows the correlation between the various sector
configurations and BBX cards.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-25
BTS Sector Configurations
68P64115A18–1
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations
Configuration
Description
3–Sector / 1 Carrier
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for a 3–sector/1–carrier frame.
ANT 1A
TX1 / RX1A
BBX–1
ANT 2A
TX2 / RX2A
BBX–2
ANT 3A
TX3 / RX3A
BBX–3
ANT 1B
RX1B
BBX–1
(diversity RX)
ANT 2B
RX2B
BBX–2
(diversity RX)
ANT 3B
RX3B
BBX–3
(diversity RX)
Carrier #
3–Sector / 1 Carrier
The configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sector/1–carrier frames in
companion configuration.
ANT 1A
TX1 / RX1A
BBX–1
ANT 2A
TX2 / RX2A
BBX–2
ANT 3A
TX3 / RX3A
BBX–3
ANT 1B
ANT 2B
ANT 3B
Carrier #
NOTE
Diversity RX (RX1B, 2B, and 3B) is received from the opposite companion frame through RX
EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B.
Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A
through RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.
3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT or 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for both
adjacent and non–adjacent channels.
ANT 1A
TX1 / RX1A
BBX–1
ANT 2A
TX2 / RX2A
BBX–2
ANT 3A
TX3 / RX3A
BBX–3
ANT 1B
TX4 / RX1B
BBX–1
(diversity RX)
ANT 2B
TX5 / RX2B
BBX–2
(diversity RX)
ANT 3B
TX6 / RX3B
BBX–3
(diversity RX)
BBX–4
(RX)
BBX–5
(RX)
BBX–6
(RX)
BBX–4
(TX & diversity
RX)
BBX–5
(TX & diversity
RX)
BBX–6
(TX & diversity
RX)
Carrier #
3–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers for
non–adjacent channels for frames in companion configuration.
ANT 1A
TX1 & 4 /
RX1A & 4A
ANT 2A
TX2 & 5 /
RX2A & 5A
ANT 3A
TX3 & 6 /
RX3A & 6A
BBX–1
BBX–4
BBX–2
BBX–5
BBX–3
BBX–6
ANT 1B
ANT 2B
ANT 3B
Carrier #
NOTE
Diversity RX (RX1B, 2B, 3B and RX4B, 5B, 6B) is received from the opposite companion frame
through RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B (see NO TAG or NO TAG).
Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A
through RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.
1-26
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
BTS Sector Configurations
68P64115A18–1
Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass Filters
NOTE
See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 1 and 3.
Bandpass Filters
3–Sector
CARRIER 1
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
CARRIER 2
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 Combiners
NOTE
See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 2 and 4.
2:1 Combiners
3–Sector
CARRIER 1
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
CARRIER 2
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
SC4812ETL0011–4
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
1-27
BTS Sector Configurations
68P64115A18–1
Notes
1-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
2
Chapter 2
Preliminary Operations
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P64115A18–1
Preliminary Operations: Overview
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage against the site-specific
documentation supplied for each BTS application. This includes
verifying module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP)
switch settings. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented. Finally, power–down and normal power–up procedures are
covered.
Cell–site Types
Sites are configured as omni or up to 3–sectors – one or two carriers.
Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
CDF/NECF
The Configuration Data File (CDF) or Network Element Configuration
File (NECF) contains site type and equipage data information and passes
it directly to the LMF during optimization. The number of modem
frames, number and types of BBX and MCC boards, and linear power
amplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in the
CDF/NECF.
NOTE
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf
files are used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files
that are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF/NECF files can cause system errors. Failure to use
the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (traffic
carrying) site can shut down the site.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the frame.
CAUTION
2-2
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling
any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD. After
removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive
surface or back into the anti–static packaging in which it was
shipped.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P64115A18–1
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules into
the appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.
NOTE
On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site
configuration (see Figure 2-1).
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card
NOTE
Configuration Switch (shown in Figure 2-1) is a feature on the
newer versions of the 800 Mhz switch card (some earlier cards
do not have the switch). Configuration shown is for 3 Sector
BTS. Switch 1 chooses BTS or MF. Switch 4 chooses 3–sector
or 6 sector. Switches 2 and 3 are not used.
SHIELDS
J1
J2
J3
Switch Card
J4
J5
Configuration
Switch
1 2 3 4
BTS ON
MF
3 Sector
6 Sector
ti-CDMA-WP-00228-v01-ildoc-ftw REF
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-3
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P64115A18–1
Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch
The backplane configuration switch is located behind the frame rear
access panel. It must be set for the frame type as shown in Figure 2-2.
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
STARTER
FRAME
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
EXPANSION
FRAME 1
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
REAR ACCESS
PANEL
T–27 BUTTON HEAD OR
T–30 PAN HEAD
TAMPER–RESISTANT
FASTENER (14)
2-4
Rear of
SC–4812T–Lite
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Ethernet LAN
68P64115A18–1
Ethernet LAN
Ethernet LAN Termination
For proper operation, each end of the primary and redundant BTS
Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN) must be terminated with a
50–ohm load. For a BTS consisting of a stand–alone or an expansion
frame, this is done by placing 50–ohm triaxial terminations on the LAN
A and B external IN and OUT connectors.
Check the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors on the I/O
plate of each frame (see Figure 2-3) and be sure terminations are
installed on all the uncabled external LAN connectors.
Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN Connectors
REAR
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
LAN A OUT
CONNECTION
LAN B OUT
CONNECTION
LAN B IN
CONNECTION
FRONT
LAN A IN
CONNECTION
ti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw REF
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-5
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
68P64115A18–1
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
Introduction
The following information is used to check for any electrical short
circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of each frame at the
site before applying power for the first time. It contains instructional
information on the proper initial power up procedures for the SC4812T
Lite stand–alone and expansion frames for both the North American
version and the International version. If directions are different for either
version, they are called out within the procedure. Please pay attention to
all cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury
to personnel.
NOTE
Unless otherwise noted, all procedures in this section are to be
followed for each frame at a site.
Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.
S Clamp–on DC current probe (600 A capability with jaw size to
accommodate 2/0 cable).
S Digital Multimeter (DMM) with standard 2mm (.080”) tip probes
S Hot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
S Receive RF cabling – up to six RX cables
S Transmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables
S For expansion frame installations, inter–frame RX diversity cabling –
six RX cables
NOTE
For DC power applications (+27 V):
S The positive power cable is red.
S The negative power cable is black. (The black power cable is
at ground potential.)
Initial Inspection and Setup
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step
Action
Be sure that the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power supplied to the frame is set to
OFF.
Verify that the external AC power supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input by performing the
procedure in Table 2-4.
DC Power System Pre-power Application Test
Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in
Table 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distribution
system.
2-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
68P64115A18–1
NOTE
The procedure in Table 2-3 is required only on initial frame
power–up or following maintenance when any major power
components (e.g., ACLC, DC PDA, Meter Alarm Panel) were
replaced or internal DC power cables were disconnected.
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test
Step
Action
Physically verify all AC power to the BTS is OFF and all DC PDA circuit breakers (Figure 2-4) are
set to OFF (pulled out).
On the DC PDA, set the MAIN BREAKER to the ON position by pushing it in. Resistance between
the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should measure between 300 Ω.
minimum 900 Ω. maximum.
Before proceeding, be sure the SCCP shelf power/converter modules PS1 and PS2 are correct by
verifying that the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
(in +27 volt systems)
–
! CAUTION
Using the incorrect type of power/converter modules will damage the module, the SCCP shelf, and
other modules installed in the SCCP shelf.
NOTE
In the following steps, if the DMM reads between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω maximum after
inserting any board/module, a low impedance problem probably exists in that board/module. Replace
the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and and turn ON the PS1 DC circuit
breaker on the DC PDA.
Resistance between the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should
typically increase as capacitors charge, finally measuring between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω.
maximum.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the PS2 converter module/circuit breaker and all other remaining modules in
the SCCP shelf.
On the DC PDA, set the PA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat step
5.
Repeat step 7 for each of the three remaining PA circuit breakers.
Carefully reconnect each PA cable one at a time. Repeat step 5 after reconnecting each cable.
– A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as module input
capacitors charge, finally indicating between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω. maximum.
10
Set the Pilot Beacon, both Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.
Repeat step 5 after pushing in each circuit breaker.
11
Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out).
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-7
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
68P64115A18–1
Figure 2-4: DC PDA
1A
1C
3A
LPA
BLOWERS
HEATEXCHANGER
CAUTION
LPA
3C
SHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERS
ONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGER
MAINTENANCEORREPAIR
30
30
30
30
15
1B
1D
3B
3D
PILOT
BEACON
25
25
MAIN BREAKER
300
10
15
PS1
PS2
50
50
PUSHBUTTON
TORESET
LPABLOWERS
ETIB
OPTIONS
SC4812TL0009–3
2-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
68P64115A18–1
External AC Power Connection Verification
Following verification of frame DC power system integrity, external AC
power connections must be verified. To accomplish this, the series of AC
voltage measurements specified in Table 2-4 is required.
CAUTION
Failure to properly connect the external AC power cable will
damage the surge protection module inside the ACLC.
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
NOTE
This procedure is required only after external AC power wiring has been initially connected or
removed and reconnected to the frame.
n WARNING
Ensure the frame is unpowered by setting the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power
supplied to the frame to OFF.
Physically verify all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuit
breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Open the ACLC circuit breaker access door, and set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down).
Remove the four screws securing the ACLC front panel assembly, and remove the ACLC front panel
assembly to gain access to the AC circuit breaker input terminals (NO TAG).
Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.
n WARNING
Do not perform the following steps while wearing an anti–static wrist strap. Serious personal injury
can result from accidently shorting high voltage or high current circuits to ground.
! CAUTION
North AMERICAN Cabinet only:
If the AC voltages measured in the following steps exceed 120 V when measuring from terminals L1
or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the higher voltages are
determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the
inputs.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral.
North American Cabinet:
– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
International Cabinet:
– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground.
North American Cabinet:
– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
International Cabinet:
– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.
Steps 7a through 7c apply to the North American cabinet only. If working on a International cabinet
continue to step 8.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-9
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests
68P64115A18–1
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
7a
– Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral on the North American cabinet.
–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
7b
– Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground on the North American cabinet.
–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
7c
! CAUTION
If the AC voltages measured (on the North American cabinet) in the following step exceeds 240 V
when measuring between terminals L1 and L2, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the
higher voltages are determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with
excessive voltage on the inputs.
– Measure from terminal L1 to terminal L2.
–– Voltage should be in the nominal range from 208 to 240 Vac.
Remove external AC power from the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to OFF.
Install the ACLC front panel assembly and secure with the four screws removed in step 1.
10
Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.
2-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Applying AC Power
68P64115A18–1
Applying AC Power
Once the external AC power connections are verified, AC power may be
applied internally to the frame. Table 2-5 provides the procedure for
applying internal AC power.
Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power
Step
Action
Be sure the requirements of Table 2-4 for AC input power connection verification have been met.
Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuit
breakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF.
If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame
to ON.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.
– For the North American cabinet:
Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).
– For the International cabinet:
Observe that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).
On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON. All the installed
rectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.
Set the MAP power switch to ON. The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the
TCP switch OFF.
! CAUTION
Once power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS to
ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.
On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON. Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.
NOTE
Depending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLT
indicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.
Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None
should be lighted at this time.
10
If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.
NOTE
The GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-11
Applying AC Power
68P64115A18–1
COMM
SENSOR 2
SENSOR 1
TO DISABLE
SENSOR FAIL
Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP)
25_C SET
TCP
SWITCH
BATT TEST
SWITCH
VOLT TEST
POINTS
MASTER
VOLTAGE
ADJ.
POWER
INDICATOR
POWER
SWITCH
SC4812TL0015–2
DC Power Application and Testing
Table 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for applying DC power and
ensuring the DC power system components are correctly functioning.
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests
Step
Action
Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Be sure the procedures in Table 2-3 (if applicable) and Table 2-5 have been performed.
! CAUTION
When measuring voltage at the VOLT TEST POINTS, be careful not to short either of the test points
to ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.
Measure voltage at the MAP VOLT TEST POINTS while pressing the 25° C SET button
(Figure 2-5). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust with the MASTER VOLTAGE ADJ. on
the MAP, if necessary, to obtain an indicated 27.4+0.2 Vdc. Release the 25° C SET button.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V
compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is
warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.
Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the cable connection point at the bottom
of the + (red) battery bus bar and chassis ground, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage
should be the same as the measurement in step 4.
Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.
Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should
measure the same as in step 4.
Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.
On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing
them in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.
– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.
. . . continued on next page
2-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Applying AC Power
68P64115A18–1
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests
Step
10
Action
On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a
time in the following sequence:
1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D).
2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)
3. ETIB
4. PILOT BEACON
5. OPTIONS
Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during the initial
power application.
NOTE
No battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.
11
If the frame is not equipped with the pilot beacon option, set the PILOT BEACON circuit breaker
to OFF.
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the battery
charging performance.
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should be
completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings drawing excess charge current
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
due to the surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus by
setting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers.
The MAP power switch should then be turned ON.
Mar 2003
Using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM, measure the current in each of the battery string
connections to the battery bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly
reduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new–battery charge level.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-13
Applying AC Power
68P64115A18–1
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
NOTE
The MAP AMP display will indicate the total current output of the rectifiers during this procedure.
As an alternative, the bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of
the total battery charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LED elements to
represent the output current. Each illuminated LED element indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8
or 8.75 Amps) of an individual rectifier’s maximum current output (70 Amps) is flowing.
RECTIFIER BAR GRAPH EXAMPLE:
Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bar graph LED elements
illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?
Answer: Each bar graph is indicating approximately 12.5% of 70 amps, therefore, 3 x 8.75 equals
26.25 amps per rectifier. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 x 26.25 A)
78.75 amps.
This charge current calculation is only valid when the RF and PA compartment electronics are not
powered on, and the RF compartment heat exchanger is turned off. This can only be accomplished if
the DC PDA MAIN BREAKER is set to OFF.
The current in each string should be approximately equal (within + 5 amps).
Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further
action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current
in each string should reduce to less than 5 amps.
Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the frame DC
Power Application and Test (Table 2-6).
NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, the MAP AMP display may indicate approximately 288 amps for
a two–carrier frame (four rectifiers) or 216 amps for a single–carrier frame (three rectifiers).
Alternately, all bar graph elements may be lighted on the rectifiers during the charge test. Either
indication shows that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It is
recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above step
before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.
Battery Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current is
less than 5 Amps per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures for
checking current levels.
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test
Step
Action
Turn the BATT TEST switch on the MAP ON (Figure 2-5). The rectifier output voltage and current
should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the MAP may
occur.
Measure the individual battery string current using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM. The
battery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 amps).
Turn BATT TEST switch OFF.
2-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Applying AC Power
68P64115A18–1
CAUTION
Failure to turn off the MAP BATT TEST switch before leaving
the site will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers
Top (Internal) Blower
Blower
Power
Cord
Heat Exchanger
Assembly
Mounting
Bracket
Bottom (Ambient) Blower
Fan Module
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
Core
T–30 Screw
T–30 Screw
Blower
Power
Cord
DC PDA
LPA
1A
1C
3A
LPA
BLOWERS
HEATEXCHANGER
CAUTION
3C
SHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERS
ONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGER
MAINTENANCEORREPAIR
30
30
30
30
15
1B
1D
3B
3D
PILOT
BEACON
25
25
MAIN BREAKER
300
10
15
PS1
PS2
50
50
PUSHBUTTON
TORESET
LPABLOWERS
ETIB
OPTIONS
OUT=OFF
IN=ON
Heat Exchanger
Blower Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Side View
SC4812TL0016–3
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-15
Power Removal
68P64115A18–1
Power Removal
Introduction
Power removal from an SC4812T Lite BTS frame is accomplished in the
following two–stage sequence:
1. DC power removal
2. AC power removal
Some maintenance, upgrade, or other activities may only require
removing DC power. In those situations where all power must be
removed from a frame, shutting down AC power will also be required.
Remove DC Power
If it becomes necessary to remove DC power from the frame, refer to
Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9: DC Power Removal
Step
Action
Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out) in the
following sequence:
1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)
2. PILOT BEACON
3. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)
4. ETIB
5. OPTIONS
6. PS1 and PS2
7. MAIN BREAKER
n WARNING
The surge capacitors in the DC PDA will store a large
electrical charge for long periods of time. Failure to discharge
these capacitors as specified in this step could result in serious
personal injury or damage to equipment.
On the DC PDA, set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to ON
(pushed in), and wait at least 30 seconds.
2-16
Set the DC PDA PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to OFF.
Set the MAP power switch to OFF.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Power Removal
68P64115A18–1
AC Power Removal
If it is necessary to remove all power from a frame, refer to NO TAG or
NO TAG, and follow the procedure in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10: AC Power Removal
Step
Mar 2003
Action
Remove DC power from the frame by following the
procedure in Table 2-9.
Set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down) in the following
sequence:
1. GFI
2. HEATER
3. RECT. 2/4
4. RECT. 1/3
5. MAIN
Set the facility circuit breaker controlling external power to
the frame to OFF.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-17
Power Application – Normal Power–up
68P64115A18–1
Power Application – Normal Power–up
Power Application Procedures
After the first power application, applying power to a BTS frame does
not require performing the voltage and resistance measurements called
out in the initial power–up procedure. The only exception to this is after
maintenance when any major power system components were replaced.
Major power system components include:
S ACLC
S DC PDA
S MAP
S Internal DC power cables
Normal power application to a BTS frame is accomplished in the
following two–stage sequence:
1. AC power application
2. DC power application
Applying Internal AC Power
To apply AC power to a BTS frame, refer to NO TAG or NO TAG, and
follow the procedure in Table 2-11.
Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame
Step
Action
If the external AC power leads for the BTS frame were disconnected and reconnected, perform the
procedure in Table 2-4 before proceeding further.
Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuit
breakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF (Figure 2-5).
If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame
to ON.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.
– For the North American cabinet:
Verify that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).
– For the International cabinet:
Verify that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).
On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON.
– All the installed rectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs
should light on each.
NOTE
In a BTS configured for single–carrier operation (rectifier #4 not installed), a minor alarm may be
generated if the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker is engaged before the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker.
. . . continued on next page
2-18
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Power Application – Normal Power–up
68P64115A18–1
Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame
Step
Action
Set the MAP power switch to ON.
– The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the TCP switch set to OFF.
! CAUTION
Once power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS to
ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.
On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON.
– Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.
NOTE
Depending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLT
indicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.
Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module).
– None should be lighted at this time.
10
If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.
NOTE
The GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use.
Apply DC Power
Refer to Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-12 to apply DC
power to a BTS frame.
Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame
Step
Action
Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
If it has not already been done, apply AC power to the frame by following the procedure in
Table 2-11.
Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.
On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing
them in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.
– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.
On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a
time in the following sequence:
1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)
2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)
3. ETIB
4. (If Pilot Beacon option is installed) PILOT BEACON
5. OPTIONS
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
2-19
Power Application – Normal Power–up
68P64115A18–1
Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame
Step
Action
Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during power
application.
NOTE
No battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.
If the frame is equipped with back–up batteries, close (push in) the battery shelf circuit breakers
(NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should be completed quickly to avoid excess
charge current draw by individual battery strings.
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
because of surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus by
setting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers. The
MAP power switch should then be turned ON.
2-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
3
Chapter 3
Optimization/Calibration
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-1
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration
Overview
This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span
lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating
software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration
of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, using
the RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts
are functioning properly.
NOTE
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”
section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any
applicable information.
Optimization Process Summary
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, such
as power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize the
BTS. Companion frames must be optimized individually as separate
BTSs. The basic optimization process consists of the following:
1. Download MGLI (GLI–bts#–1) with application code and data and
then enable MGLI.
NOTE
GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.
2. Use the LMF status function and verify that all of the installed
devices of the following types respond with status information:
CSM, BBX, GLI, MCC8, and, if RFDS is installed, TSU or
RFDS–1X RPROC. If a device is installed and powered up but is
not responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device is
not listed in the CDF file. The CDF/NECF file must be corrected
before the device can be accessed by the LMF.
3. Download device application code and data to all devices of the
following types:
– CSM
– BBX
– Remaining GLI (GLI–bts#–2)
– MCC
4. Download the RFDS TSIC or RFDS–1X RPROC (if installed).
5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.
6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
– Secondary CSM (slot CSM 2)
– Primary CSM (slot CSM 1)
– All MCCs
7. Using the LMF test equipment selection function, select the test
equipment to be used for the calibration.
8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated with the LMF computer and software build which will be
used for the optimization/calibration. Cable calibration values can be
entered manually, if required.
3-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
9. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
12. If the TX calibration fails again, troubleshoot and correct the
problem causing the failure, and repeat the full optimization for the
failed path.
13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, troubleshoot and
correct the problem causing the failure, and run the individual tests
as required until all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell-site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX).
Sector/Sector sites are the three–sector configuration. The SC4812ET
Lite does not support six–sector operation. Each cell site type has unique
characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
NOTE
For more information on the different in site types, please refer
to the applicable Hardware Installation manual.
CDF/NECF
The CDF/NECF (Configuration Data File/Network Element
Configuration File) contains information that defines the BTS and data
used to download files to the devices. A CDF/NECF file must be placed
in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log into that
BTS. CDF/NECF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a
floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF
computer has that capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–line
documentation for more information.
The CDF/NECF includes the following information:
S Download instructions and protocol
S Site specific equipage information
S SCCP shelf allocation plan
– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including IS–95A/B or
CDMA2000 1X capability and redundancy
– CSM equipage including redundancy
– Multi Channel Card 24E, 8E, or –1X (MCC24E, MCC8E, or
MCC–1X) channel element allocation plan. This plan indicates how
the SCCP shelf is configured, and how the paging, synchronization,
traffic, and access channel elements (and associated gain values) are
assigned among the (up to 4) MCC24Es, MCC8Es, and/or
MCC–1Xs in the shelf.
S Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-3
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, antenna
gain and antenna feed line loss can be combined to calculate the
required transmit power at the frame antenna connections. The
corresponding BBX output power required to achieve that power level
on any channel/sector can then be determined based on Bay Level
Offset (BLO) data established during the optimization process.
NOTE
Refer to Figure 3-1 and the LMF Help function on–line
documentation for additional information on the layout of the
LMF directory structure (including CDF/NECF file locations
and formats).
BTS System Software Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
BTSs configured for Circuit Backhaul use bts.cdf files. BTSs configured
for Packet Backhaul use bts.necf files (bts–xxx.xml) located on the
OMC/R.
NOTE
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf files for
the BTS must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–#
folder in the LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files
can cause wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF
files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the
site.
The CDF/NECF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS
formatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF
computer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–line
documentation for the procedure.
Site Equipage Verification
If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF/NECF,
and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage
data in the CDF/NECF matches the actual site hardware using a
CDF/NECF conversion table.
CAUTION
3-4
– Use extreme care not to make any changes to the
CDF/NECF content while viewing the file. Changes to the
CDF/NECF can cause the site to operate unreliably or
render it incapable of operation.
– Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal
and installation of any card/module. After removal, the
card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or
back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Preparing the LMF
Overview of Packet BTS files
R16.0 and earlier releases had the configuration file called CDF for each
BTS and CBSC used by LMF. In 16.1 Packet BTS, BTS with GLI3
booting in packet binary, the CDF is replaced by two new configuration
files called Network Element Configuration Base (NECB) and Network
Element Change Journal (NECJ). The NECB contains the baseline
configuration and is analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains all
the changes made to the configuration since the last time the NECB was
re–generated. Once the NECJ gets to 80% of its maximum size, the
NECB is re–generated and all the updates are rolled into it.
These files play much broader and vital role than previous CDF files.
GLI3 booting in circuit binaries works similar to R16.0.
A few LMF related important facts about these files are listed below.
S Both files (NECB and NECJ) are in XML format.
S NECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information and
NECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which are
not updated in the NECB.
S Both files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available is
Internet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by any
other word processor, but the XML tags will also be seen with them.
S These files will be created by OMC–R from MIB as per the BTS
provisioning.
S These files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade on
the system for each BTS.
S These files will reside on both OMC–R and Packet–GLI3 (unlike
CDF) and will be synchronized periodically between them.
S Both NECB and NECJ file contain a “SoftwareVersion” field in their
header section indicating the system release version of these files.
S Instead of the bts#.cdf file, the packet LMF uses a bts#.XML file,
which is a copy of the NECB.XML file.
S Packet–GLI3 will need these files for site initialization.
S The scope of NECB has grown much broader than CDF and has much
more BTS centric information. The use of generic version of these
files should be strictly avoided for the correct site initialization.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-5
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
LMF Features and Installation Requirements
Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software
must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting
Motorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment
and Software in Chapter 1).
NOTE
For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platform
must be configured to display more than 256 colors. See the
operating system software instructions for verifying and
configuring the display settings.
Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided on
CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:
S LMF application program on CD ROM
S CDF/NECF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
S CBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk or CD ROM)
FTP Server
To be able to download files to the GLI3, the LMF now runs FTP server
on the LMF laptop. The LMF FTP server runs from the LMFs home
directory. All the files necessary to run the LMF FTP server are installed
from the LMF CD. The FTP server is automatically started by the LMF
upon successful Login to a Packet BTS.
In addition, the LMF provides a new option in the Tools menu called
FTP Server. The option starts the LMFs FTP server if Start is selected,
and stops the server if Stop is selected. The LMFs FTP server runs on
port 21. If any other process is using that port, the error message is
displayed to the user stating that the port is occupied. There is another
option under FTP Server menu called FTP Monitor, which allows the
user to watch FTP activity b/w the LMF and GLI.
Firewalls
Firewalls will block the FTP requests from the Packet GLI to the LMF
laptop. You must disable your firewall before attempting the BTS Synch
command. Some common firewall programs to look for include Network
ICE, BlackICE, Norton’s Desktop Firewall, Enterprise Firewall, and
Personal Firewall.
FTP Server Port in use
On some Windows 2000 installations, a process called “inetd.exe”
makes the FTP server port 21 unusable by the LMF. If the LMF reports
that the FTP server could not start because the port is in use, make sure
the inetd.exe is not running by using the Task Manager’s process list. If
inetd.exe is running, end the process by selecting it and clicking the
“End Process” button. Inetd32.exe is NOT the same and ending it will
not resolve this problem.
3-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
LMF File Structure Overview
The LMF uses a :\ folder that contains all of
the essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following
list outlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,
these folders are created as part of the LMF installation. Refer to the
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folder
structure.
Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure
(C:)
x:\ folder
cdma folder
BTS–nnn folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)
code folder
data folder
NOTE
Mar 2003
The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not available
from the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders may
be present as as a legacy from previous software versions or
downloaded from the CBSC/OMC–R.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-7
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
LMF Home Directory
The LMF installation program creates the default home directory,
c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)
in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home
directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located.
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed.
3-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location
NECF
The NECF actually consists of two files: the NECB and NECJ. The
naming convention for the NECB and NECJ is:
NECB*bts#.xml
NECJ*bts#.xml
Where:
* = any characters can be substituted there
# = the actual integer BTS number
The NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,
except for the “B” and “J” difference after the initial NEC characters.
The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the
\cdma\bts–# directory corresponding to the BTS frame
they are for.
Load Information File (LIF)
The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specified
System Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the OLF file
that was used pre–Packet.
The naming convention for the LIF is:
NE_LIF.xml
The LIF must reside in the \cdma\loads\ directory, where  = the home
directory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf  = the System Software Release Number (e.g.
2.16.1.0.10).
Cal File
The Cal File still resides in the \cdma\bts–# directory
and is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of the BTS.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-9
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
LMF Installation and Update Procedures
This section provides information and instructions for installing and
updating the LMF software and files.
NOTE
First Time Installation Sequence:
1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)
2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator
3. Install LMF application programs
4. Install/create BTS folders
NOTE
Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software
because the installation of the LMF modifies some of the files
that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win
over–writes these modifications.
There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the
CD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds to
the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the
Device Images install after the WinLMF installation.
If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be
available for binary updates.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF application
program using the LMF CD ROM.
Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROM
n Step
Action
Insert the LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive and perform the
following as required:
1a
– If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on
the screen.
1b
– If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.
Click on the Start button
Select Run.
Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.
NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive
letter.
3-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to execute
optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or
bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files must be obtained from the CBSC and
put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requires creating
versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy diskette
and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the LMF computer.
NOTE
– If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to
copy the CDF or NECF files from the CBSC.
– On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be
used in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos
bts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done using a copy
of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is
not changed to DOS format.
NOTE
When copying CDF or NECF files, comply with the following
to prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:
S The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or
bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) filenames must correspond to
the locally-assigned numbers for each BTS and its controlling
CBSC.
S The generic cbsc–1.cdf (or cbsc–#.necf) file supplied with
the Windows LMF will work with locally numbered BTS
CDF files. Using this file will not provide a valid
optimization unless the generic file is edited to replace
default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the
operational parameters used locally.
The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF
files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For further information, refer
to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.
Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer
n Step
Action
AT THE CBSC:
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject –q and press the Enter key.
Type mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
S Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Mar 2003
Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd 
(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-11
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer
n Step
Action
Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or
bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files on the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).
NOTE
S Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use
the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text
editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF
computer is, therefore, not recommended.
S Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).
Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF computer.
When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.
AT THE LMF:
3-12
11
If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.
12
Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files into
the LMF computer.
13
Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the :\\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf/cbsc–#.cdf) file pair copied
from the CBSC.
14
Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf)
files from the diskette to the corresponding :\\cdma\bts–# folders created in
Step 13.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field
Replaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communication
session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows
operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be
saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal
connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection
parameters each time an MMI session is required to support
optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs>Accessories>
Perform one of the following:
S For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or
S For Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select COM1 or COM2 (Win
NT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win 98) for the RS–232 port connection and click OK.
NOTE
For LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment
and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to prevent conflicts.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-13
Preparing the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File > Exit
Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.
10
Perform one of the following:
S If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12
S From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.
11
Perform one of the following:
S For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
S For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
16
Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:
File > Close
3-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation
68P64115A18–1
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation
T1/E1 Span Interface
NOTE
At active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and
place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span line
cable connectors until the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punchblock for spans,
customer alarms, remote GPS, and BTS frame alarms. See NO TAG and
refer to NO TAG for the physical location and punchdown location
information.
Before connecting the LMF computer to the frame LAN, the
OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS. This will allow
the LMF to control the BTS, and prevent the CBSC from inadvertently
sending control information to the BTS during LMF–based tests.
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s)
Once the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the span(s) must be
disabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disable
the spans, disconnect the BTS–to–CBSC Transcoder span cable
connectors from the Span I/O cards (Figure 3-2).
Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
(IF USED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299 REF
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-15
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation
68P64115A18–1
T1/E1 Span Isolation
Table 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation.
Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
3-16
Action
Have the OMCR/CBSC place the BTS OOS.
To disable the span lines, locate the connector for the span or
spans which must be disabled and remove the respective
connector from the applicable SCCP cage Span I/O board
(Figure 3-2).
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
LMF to BTS Connection
68P64115A18–1
LMF to BTS Connection
Connect the LMF to the BTS
The LMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or B connector
located behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-3 below shows
the general location of these connectors. LAN A is considered the
primary LAN.
Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS
n Step
Action
To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable access door, then pull apart the fabric
covering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-3).
Connect the LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter.
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet connection to
the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC transformer. In this
case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.
* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)
must not touch the chassis during optimization.
Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS door.
Pull apart hook–and–loop fabric
and gain access to the LAN A or
LAN B LMF BNC connector.
SC 4812T LITE
LMF BNC “T” Connections on
left side of frame (Ethernet
“A” shown; Ethernet “B”
covered with hook–and–loop
fabric)
10BaseT/10Base2
Converter Connects
Directly to BNC T
LMF Computer
Terminal with Mouse
PCMCIA Ethernet
Adpater & Ethernet
UTP Adapter
Universal Twisted
Pair (UTP) cable
(RJ11 connectors)
115 VAC Power
Connection
ti-CDMA-WP-00232-v01-ildoc-ftw
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-17
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Using the LMF
Basic LMF Operation
LMF Coverage in This Publication – The LMF application program
supports maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All references to
the LMF in this publication are to the CDMA portion of the program.
Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows the
user to work in the two following operating environments which are
accessed using the specified desktop icons:
S Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
S Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CDMA CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environment
includes performing the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI
environment:
S Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.
NOTE
3-18
Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual are
performed using the GUI environment.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
The LMF Display and the BTS
BTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab is
displayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with
“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (for
example, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one frame
for the BTS, there will only be one tab.
CDF/NECF Requirements – For the LMF to recognize the devices
installed in the BTS, a BTS CDF/NECF file which includes equipage
information for all the devices in the BTS must be located in the
applicable :\\cdma\bts–# folder. To provide
the necessary channel assignment data for BTS operation, a CBSC CDF
file which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is also required in
the folder.
RFDS Display – If an RFDS is included in the CDF/NECF file, an
RFDS tab labeled with “RFDS,” a dash and the BTS number–frame
number combination (for example, RFDS–812–1) will be displayed.
Graphical User Interface Overview
The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:
S Select the device or devices.
S Select the action to apply to the selected device(s).
S While action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.
S The status report window indicates when the the action is complete
and displays other pertinent information.
S Clicking the OK button closes the status report window.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-19
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Understanding GUI Operation
The following screen captures are provided to help understand how the
GUI operates:
– Figure 3-4 depicts the differences between packet and circuit
CDMA “cdf” file identification. Note that if there is a packet
version “bts” file, the “(P)” is added as a suffix. There is a
corresponding “(C)” for the circuit mode version.
– Figure 3-5 depicts the Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) state
of a packet mode SC4812T. Note that an “X” is on the front of each
card that is under Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) control
by the GLI3 card.
– Figure 3-6 depicts three of the available packet mode commands.
Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)
control of all cards as shown in Figure 3-5 by an “(X)”. In that state
the LMF may only status a card. In order to download code or test a
card, the LMF must request Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)
control of the card by using the shown dropdown menu. It also uses
this menu to release control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3
will also assume control of the cards after the LMF logs out of the
BTS. The packet mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release
and NECB and NECJ files which point to a tape release stored on
the GLI3. When the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain that
card with the code on that tape release.
– Figure 3-7 depicts a packet mode site that has the MCC–1 and the
BBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missing
from the front of these two cards.
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.
3-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-21
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T
3-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-23
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control
3-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Command Line Interface Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that
the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to
use the same handler.
When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds and
uses an in–progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.
This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS login
session.
If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (this
happens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts the
GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the user
starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warning
message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
Verb
Device including device identifier parameters
Switch
Option parameters consisting of:
– Keywords
– Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value
– Parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx–– rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to the LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLI
commands and their usage.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-25
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Logging Into a BTS
Logging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTS
and the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at a
time.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
S The LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer.
S A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists.
S The LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting the
Windows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restart
the computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance with
Table 3-5 and Figure 3-3.
CAUTION
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf/necf and cbsc–#.cdf file are
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct
CDF/NECF files can result in invalid optimization. Failure to
use the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live
(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Start the LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF is
not running).
– An LMF window will open and display the LMF build number in the title bar.
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
3-26
Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Click on Ping.
– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
– If there is no response the following is displayed:
128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out
If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to
respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B
link cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.
Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop–down list
(default is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
NOTE
“Use a Tower Top Amplifier” is not applicable to the SC4812T Lite.
10
Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS and frame numbers is displayed.)
NOTE
S If an attempt is made to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
S There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
S If the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devices
can be seen.
S If the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-27
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
NOTE
If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the same
time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login must be
performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 to start the GUI
environment and log into a BTS.
Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI
environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI
environment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the same
BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–
host=
port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for
this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS)
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this
BTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS)
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts–33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
3-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI
operating environments.
NOTE
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a
BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS
at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment
will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is
performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that the
login or logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on BTS in the BTS menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout
pop-up message will appear).
Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login
tab will appear.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window
running at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–up
message will appear stating the system could not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can
be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system
could not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is not
logged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5.
Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm
Logout pop–up, and click OK in the Logout Error pop–up which
appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
S The Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the
displayed BTS.
S You can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking
on the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the
File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message will appear.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-29
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time
and further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2.
Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=logout bts–33
13:24:51.028 Command In Progress
13:24:52.04
Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following
command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the
window closes:
Killing background processes....
3-30
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Establishing an MMI Communication Session
Equipment Connection – Figure 3-8 illustrates common equipment
connections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations on
FRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures which
require the MMI communication session.
Initiate MMI Communication – For those procedures which require
MMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the
procedures in Table 3-10 to initiate the communication session.
Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which requires
the MMI communication session.
If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMF
from COM1 by performing the following:
2a
– Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.
–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.
2b
– In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the
Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Mar 2003
Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the LMF computer key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-31
Using the LMF
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
To FRU MMI port
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
FW00687
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help in
the window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–down
menu.
3-32
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Pinging the Processors
68P64115A18–1
Pinging the Processors
Pinging the BTS
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be verified. Figure 3-9 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration for an SC4812T Lite stand–alone or companion frame.
The drawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and B
LANs.
Ping is a program that sends request data packets to hosts on a network,
in this case GLI modules on the BTS LAN, to obtain a response from the
“target” host specified by an IP address.
Follow the steps in Table 3-11 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling
any circuit card/module to prevent damage by Electro–Static
Discharge (ESD).
Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
OUT
50Ω
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812T- Lite I/O
Interconnect Panel
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
SIGNAL
GROUND
FRAME GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
OUT
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812TL0013–5
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-33
Pinging the Processors
68P64115A18–1
NOTE
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations must be
installed on each frame/enclosure external LAN connector before
performing this test. All other processor board LAN connections
are made through the backplanes.
Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI card which has been
replaced, perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.
Be sure any uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear of
frame – NO TAG and Figure 3-9) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 and
Figure 3-3.)
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector.
– The LMF session should remain active.
Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B IN connector.
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the MGLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI card in slot GLI–1 in field BTS units.
Click on OK.
10
If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:
Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is no response, the following is displayed:
Request timed out
– If the GLI fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems would be: failure of the LMF to login, shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, open
cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI itself.
11
Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-8, exit from the LMF program, and restart the Windows
operating system on the LMF computer.
12
Restart the LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function on–line documentation, and log into
the BTS as described in Table 3-6.
13
Perform steps 7 through 10 again.
– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is still no response, proceed to step 14.
14
If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel reset
pushbutton and perform steps 7 through 10 again.
NOTE
Refer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.
. . . continued on next page
3-34
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Pinging the Processors
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
15
After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTS
frame LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-9). Disconnect the LMF cable
from the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) (refer to
Figure 3-3).
16
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.
17
Repeat steps 5 through 9 using LAN B.
18
After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination on
the frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.
19
Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A.
20
Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch to
primary LAN A.
21
Repeat steps 5 through 9 to ensure proper primary LAN operation.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-35
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Download the BTS
Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSC
using the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) code
and data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before
the BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine
maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is only
done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level in
the device is not compatible with the required release level of the site
operating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to
perform the download.
If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located in
Appendix G.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM
code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.
ROM code must be manually selected for download.
NOTE
The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROM
code loaded at the factory.
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded will change to
OOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when the
download is completed. A compatible revision–level RAM code must
then be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM and
RAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.
The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software release
being used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA
Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD–ROM containing the BSS
software).
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAM
code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM code
can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected
automatically if the file is in the :\\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is the
download code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameter
of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have the
correct hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will
change to OOS_RAM (yellow).
3-36
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automatically
also downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, the
MGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI will
not be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).
When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through the
LMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).
For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM
(yellow).
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:
S Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)
S Redundant GLI (GLI2 or GLI3)
S Clock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code
must be loaded)
S Multi Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC–1X) cards
S Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X) cards
S RFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS–1X RFDS
PROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed
NOTE
Mar 2003
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM code
and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status before
downloading any other device. The RAM code download
process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and then
enables the MGLI.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-37
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not
compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before
downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the
procedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the
correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.
Prerequisite
Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being
used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCt
CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containing
the BSS software).
Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
3-38
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the
BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).
Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status
from the BTS menu bar.
In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM
Ver column for each GLI2.
If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software
release being used on the BSS, perform the following:
4a
– Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, as
applicable.
4b
– Disconnect the LMF computer.
4c
– Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.
4d
– Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS
devices.
When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being
used, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and
proceed to downloading RAM code and data.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to download the RAM code and
data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.
Prerequisites
S Prior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded.
S The LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5), and
is logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-6).
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
n Step
Mar 2003
Action
Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and
data downloads by performing the following steps:
1a
– Click on Tools in the LMF menu bar, and select Update
NextLoad > CDMA from the pull–down menus.
1b
– Click on the BTS to be loaded.
–– The BTS will be highlighted.
1c
– Click the button next to the correct code version for the software
release being used.
–– A black dot will appear in the button circle.
1d
– Click Save.
1e
– Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.
Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >
Code/Data in the pull–down menus.
– A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s)
status.
Click OK to close the status window.
– The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and
enabled.
Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs
by clicking on the devices and repeating Steps 3 and 4.
Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-39
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
Downloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for each
device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action.
NOTE
– CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software
version needs to be loaded.
– When downloading to multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). These
devices can be loaded individually after completing the
multiple download.
Follow the steps in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data to
non–GLI devices.
Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
n Step
Action
Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on
them.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >
Code/Data in the pull–down menus.
– A status report is displayed that shows the results of the
download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is
completed.
NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM
code and data have changed to the OOS_RAM state (yellow), the
status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
NOTE
The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be
downloaded without doing a code download anytime a device is
OOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.
To download just the firmware application data to each device, select
the target device and select: Device>Download>Data
BBX Cards Remain OOS_ROM
If BBX cards remain OOS_ROM (blue) after power–up or following
code load, refer to Table 6-7, Steps 9 and 10.
3-40
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs
CSMs must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in the
following two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. For
additional information on the CSM sub–system, see “Clock
Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description” in the CSM
System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter.
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options.
Local GPS
Mate GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for source 2 & 3)
HSO Extender
LFR (only for source 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
NONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
S MGLI is INS_ACT (bright green)
S CSM is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)
Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source
n Step
Select the applicable CSM(s) for which the clock source is to be
selected.
Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSM/MAWI >
Select Clock Source... in the pull–down menu list.
– A CSM clock reference source selection window will appear.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source
pick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock Reference
Sources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be
used.
Click on the OK button.
– A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
NOTE
Mar 2003
Action
For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver
“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot before
continuing.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-41
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Enable CSMs
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs
n Step
Action
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable card in slot CSM 2 first.
Click on the target CSM.
Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the pull–down menu list.
– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable operation.
– Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
– The board in slot CSM 1 interfaces with the GPS receiver. The enable sequence for this board can
take up to one hour (see below).
– FAIL may be shown in the status report table for a slot CSM 1 enable action. If Waiting For Phase
Lock is shown in the Description field, do not cancel the enable process. The CSM will change to
the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
* IMPORTANT
– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and
operated by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alters
satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS
contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
– If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the
GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.
– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position
fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS
receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
NOTE
– If two CSMs are installed and the board in slot CSM 1 has enabled, the LMF CSM cage view
should show slot CSM 1 as bright green (INS–ACT) and slot CSM 2 as dark green (INS–SBY)
– After CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
3-42
If more than an hour has passed without the board in slot CSM 1 enabling, refer to the CSM System
Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter (see Table 3-18, Figure 3-10, and
Table 3-19) to determine the cause.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Download the BTS
68P64115A18–1
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
NOTE
The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled
(IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), prior to downloading and enabling an
MCC.
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs
n Step
Mar 2003
Action
If the GLI/MCC/BBX view is not displayed in the LMF window, click
on the GLI/MCC/BBX area of the SCCP shelf.
Click on the target MCC(s), or click on Select in the BTS menu bar,
and select MCCs in the pull–down menu list.
Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the
pull–down menu list.
– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable
operation.
Click OK to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-43
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description
Overview – Each BTS CSM sub–system features two CSM boards per
RFMF. The primary function of the CSM cards is to maintain CDMA
system time. GPS is used as the primary timing reference and
synchronizes the entire cellular system. In typical operation, the primary
CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS
signals. These signals are provided by either an on–board GPS receiver
module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (RGPS). RGPS uses a GPS
receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output. The second
generation CSM card (CSM–II) is required when using the RGPS. A
CSM–II card can also be equipped with a local GPS receiver daughter
card to support an RF–GPS signal.
SCCP Shelf CSM Card Slot Assignments – The GPS receiver is
interfaced to the board in SCCP shelf slot CSM 1. This card is the
primary timing source, while the card in slot CSM 2 provides
redundancy. The redundant card, does not have a GPS receiver.
CSM–II Card Type Description – Each CSM–II card features a
temperature–stabilized crystal oscillator that provides 19.6608 MHz
clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz reference signals to the
synchronization source selected from the following (refer to Table 3-19
for source selection/verification procedures):
S GPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/RGPS
S LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability
Oscillator (HSO)
S External reference oscillator sources
CDMA Clock Distribution Card (CCD) Description – CCD cards
buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clock
signals from the CSM cards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM
1, and CCD 2 is married to the card in slot CSM 2.
CSM Card Redundancy – The BTS switches between the primary and
redundant units (card slots CSM 1 and CSM 2, respectively) upon failure
or command. A failure in CSM 1 or CCD 1 will cause the system to
switch to the CSM 2–CCD 2 redundant card pair. GPS timing
synchronization is continually maintained between the primary and
redundant CSM–CCD pairs.
Secondary Timing References – The BTS may be equipped with a
LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR), a High Stability Oscillator
(HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as
a secondary timing reference. Continuous GPS synchronization is
maintained for the LFR or HSO secondary timing references. The CSM
monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.
3-44
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Timing Source Fault Management – Fault management has the
capability of switching between the GPS synchronization source and the
LFR/HSO backup source in the event of a GPS receiver failure. During
normal operation, the card in slot CSM 1 selects GPS as the primary
timing source (Table 3-19). The source selection can also be overridden
via the LMF or by the system software.
Front Panel LEDs
The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:
S Steady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).
S Rapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR
(STBY).
S Flashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attempting
to lock on GPS signal.
S Rapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble
Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-45
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)
General
The CSM and the LFR/HSO – The CSM performs the overall
configuration and status monitoring functions for the LFR/HSO. In the
event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is capable of maintaining
synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal.
LFR – The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive
LORAN–C RF signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal,
which is synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS
time. The LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS
lock.
HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
The LFR2 and HSO2 (second generation cards) both can export a timing
signal to other BTS frames located at a site. These secondary frames
require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) module whether the primary frame
has an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the primary
frame and interfaces with the CSM cards in the secondary frames. LFR
and LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-19).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(Table 3-19).
NOTE
3-46
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60
minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM card
warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator
frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up
allows the Rubidium standard time base to stabilize in frequency
before any measurements are made.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock
Synchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF path
verification tests.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
1a
Action
Perform one of the following as required by installed equipment:
– For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primary
CSM slot, CSM 1, and that the card is INS_ACT (bright green).
NOTE
Verify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot CSM 1.
1b
– For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM–II card is installed in primary slot CSM 1 and that the
card is INS_ACT (bright green).
NOTE
Verify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or subsequent.
Remove the card from slot CSM 2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port
(via null modem card) to the MMI port on the card in slot CSM 1 (see Figure 3-10).
Reinstall the card removed from slot CSM 2.
Start an MMI communication session with the card in slot CSM 1 by using the Windows desktop
shortcut icon (see Table 3-10) .
When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION
Mar 2003
In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antenna to the
RF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or
receiver can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected
to any other RF connector.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-47
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM card shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
GPS Initialization/Verification
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
S The LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM
as shown in Figure 3-10.
S An MMI communication session has been started (Table 3-10), and
the CSM> prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window
(Table 3-18).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper
GPS receiver functioning.
3-48
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– The system will display a response similar to the following:
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPS
receivers:
sources
– When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed–out*
Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid source
by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-49
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
NOTE
If any of the above areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage
3-50
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
68P64115A18–1
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
Mar 2003
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-51
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
NOTE
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
10
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3-52
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB –6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB –4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
> This must be greater
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-53
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
–3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
LFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 2
LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
3-54
Close the HyperTerminal window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Test Equipment Set-up
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS
The following types of test equipment are required to perform calibration
and ATP tests:
S LMF
S Communications system analyzer model supported by the LMF
S Power meter model supported by the LMF (required when using the
HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)
S Non–radiating transmit line termination load
S Directional coupler and in–line attenuator
S RF cables and adapters
Refer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:
S Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15, and Figure 3-16 show the test set
connections for TX calibration
S Figure 3-17 through Figure 3-22 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests
Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIB
bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have
a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address
settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items
are as follows:
S Signal generator address: 1
S Power meter address: 13
S Communications system analyzer: 18
Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIB
Addresses section of Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change the
GPIB address of each piece of employed test equipment to match the
applicable addresses above
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-55
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Supported Test Equipment
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test
connections must be through a 30 dB directional coupler plus a
20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800 MHz and 1.9 GHz
BTSs.
IS–95A/B Operation
Optimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B sites or carriers may be
performed using the following test equipment:
S CyberTest
S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator
S Advantest R3465 spectrum analyzer with R3561L signal generator
and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
S Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator
S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935)
S Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface and, for 1.9 GHz,
PCS Interface) and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
S Rubidium Standard Timebase – optional
CDMA2000 1X Operation
Optimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers may
be performed using the following test equipment:
S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator
S Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator
S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for
1X FER
Test Equipment Preparation
See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and
power meter to perform calibration and ATP .
3-56
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Test Equipment Connection Charts
To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment
connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in
the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read down
the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of the
test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end
connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate
equipment and/or BTS connector.
IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Connections
Table 3-21 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meets
Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.
Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
Mar 2003
Cyber–Test
EVEN
SEC REF
TIME
BASE IN
Advantest
R3465
HP 8921A
HP 8921
W/PCS
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
BTS
EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–I
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50W
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF
GEN OUT
RF OUT
50W
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
20 DB
BTS
ATTEN. PORT
TX1–6
RX1–6
3-57
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test Equipment
Connections
Table 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and
IS–95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the
LMF.
Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
ANALYZER
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
10 MHZ
Agilent
8935
(Option
200 or
R2K)
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
Advantest
R3267
Agilent
E4406A
Agilent
E4432
Signal
Gen.
EXT TRIG
TRIGGER
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
EXT REF
IN
EXT REF
IN
HP–IB
GP–IB
10 MHZ
REF
OUT
10 MHZ
OUT
GPIB
10 MHZ OUT
(SWITCHED)
GPIB
10 MHZ
IN
SERIAL
I/O
SIGNAL SOURCE
CONTROLLED
SERIAL I/O
3-58
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50 W
Advantest
R3562
Signal
Generator
EXT TRIG
IN
SYNC
MONITOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
FREQ
MONITOR
GP–IB
Power
Meter
HP–IB
GPIB
Interface
GPIB
LMF
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
BTS
SERIAL
PORT
SYNTHE
REF IN
SERIAL
I/O
RF INPUT
50 W
20 DB
BTS
ATTEN. PORT
RF OUTPUT
50 W
RF OUT
50 W
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
TX1–6
RX1–6
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Equipment Warm-up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to
performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS
stability and contributes to optimization accuracy.
– Time spent running initial or normal power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX
OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.
– At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna
(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to do
so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment
damage.
Automatic Cable Calibration Set–up
Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the cable calibration setup for the test
sets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts the
location of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,
and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-26
provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.
Manual Cable Calibration
If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in
Appendix F.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-59
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup –
CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
Motorola CyberTest
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used
with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest test set.
B. RX TEST CAL SETUP FOR TRDC
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest test
set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A
(formerly HP 8935)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF
IN/OUT
Advantest Model R3465
C. TX TEST AND DRDC RX TEST CAL SETUP
RF OUT 50Ω
50 Ω
ΤERM.
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
INPUT 50Ω
20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
DUPLEX
OUT
ANT
IN
TX CABLE FOR
TX TEST CABLE
CALIBRATION
TEST
SET
RX CABLE FOR
DRDC RX TEST
CABLE CALIBRATION
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
3-60
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562
CALIBRATION SET UP
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
RF OUTPUT
50 Ω
TEST
SET
B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RF INPUT
50 Ω
NOTE:
RX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(FIGURE F-16).
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
INPUT 50 Ω
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RF OUT
50 Ω
TX CABLE FOR
TX TEST CABLE
CALIBRATION
NOTE:
RX CABLE FOR
DRDC RX TEST
CABLE CALIBRATION
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
Mar 2003
TEST
SET
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-61
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series
E6380A (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁ
TEST
SET
RF OUTPUT
50 Ω
B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
NOTE:
TEST
SET
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET
(FIGURE F-15).
Agilent E7495A
D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF
OUT
RF
IN
20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TX CABLE FOR
TX TEST CABLE
CALIBRATION
TEST
SET
RX CABLE FOR
DRDC RX TEST
CABLE CALIBRATION
3-62
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Set-up for TX Calibration
Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –
CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
FRONT PANEL
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RF IN/OUT
GPIB
RF
IN/OUT
TX TEST
CABLE
NOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
RF
IN/OUT
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN
PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/
AUDIT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-63
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter
TEST SETS
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
R3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TX
CALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BE
USED.
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
POWER METER
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX TEST
CABLE
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
3-64
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Agilent E4406A
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
RF INPUT 50 Ω
OR INPUT 50 Ω
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN
PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/
AUDIT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
RF INPUT
50 Ω
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
Advantest R3267
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
INPUT 50 Ω
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-65
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Set–up for ATP
Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for ATP tests.
Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown –
CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT
RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.
RF GEN OUT,
RF OUT 50Ω,
RX TEST
OR RF IN/OUT
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX
SIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE
DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)
ÏÏÏÏ
Ì
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RF
IN/OUT
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
RF IN/OUT
OR
INPUT 50 Ω
RF GEN
OUT
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
NOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is not
used with the Cybertest test set. The TX
cable is connected directly to the Cybertest
test set.
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
Advantest Model R3465
SYNC MONITOR EVEN
SEC TICK PULSE
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
BNC
“T”
TX TEST
CABLE
RF OUT 50Ω
TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR
ON REAR OF TEST SET
(FOR DETAILS, SEE
FIGURE F-13)
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT 50Ω
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
RF IN/OUT
10 MHZ
REF OUT
3-66
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,
CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION
FRAME.
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RX TEST
CABLE
RF OUT ONLY
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE
TX AND RX TEST CABLES
CONNECT TO THE DRDC
ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
RF IN/OUT
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX TEST
CABLE
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
* FOR 1900 MHZ
ONLY
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
PCS INTERFACE
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORTS
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
RF
IN/OUT
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
DUPLEX
OUT
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
NOTE:
FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THE
HP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUT
TX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-67
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –
Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A
(Bottom)
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
RF OUTPUT 50 Ω
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON
COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,
CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO
ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED
COMPANION FRAME.
10 MHZ
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
RX TEST
CABLE
Á
Á
ÁÁ
SIGNAL GENERATOR
RF IN/OUT
OR
RF INPUT
50 Ω
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
GPIB
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
EXT
REF
IN
TRIGGER IN
OR
EVEN SEC
SYNCH IN
10 MHZ
REF OUT
OR
10 MHZ
OUT
HP–IB
OR
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
RF
IN/OUT
BNC
“T”
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
NOTES:
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET
BNC
“T”
50 Ω
TERM
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE
STATION TEST SET.
DUPLEXED
TX/RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
(SEE FIGURE F-15)
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
GPIB
CABLE
DRDC
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
ANT
CPLD
BTS
CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS *
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO
MPC
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
GPIB ADRS
FREQ
MONITOR
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE:
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(SEE FIGURE F-16).
CDMA
LMF
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
SYNC
MONITOR
BNC
“T”
3-68
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs –
Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON
COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,
CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO
ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED
COMPANION FRAME.
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
RF OUT
50 Ω
SIGNAL GENERATOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
SYNTHE
REF
IN
EXT
TRIG IN
GPIB
RX TEST
CABLE
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
INPUT
50 Ω
10 MHZ
OUT
EXT TRIG
GPIB
INPUT 50 Ω
TX TEST
CABLE
BNC
“T”
RF OUT
50 Ω
50 Ω
TERM
BNC
“T”
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
DUPLEXED
TX/RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
NOTE:
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)
GPIB
CABLE
DRDC
ANT
CPLD
BTS
CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TO
MPC
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
CDMA
LMF
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Mar 2003
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
3-69
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –
Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT RX TEST
CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.
Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A
(Bottom)
RX TEST
CABLE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
RF OUTPUT 50 Ω
ÁÁ
Á
Á
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
RF IN/OUT
OR RF INPUT 50 Ω
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
PATTERN
TRIG IN
GPIB
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
EXT
REF
IN
10 MHZ
OUT
TRIGGER IN
OR
EVEN SEC
SYNCH IN
GPIB
RF
IN/OUT
BNC
“T”
10 MHZ
IN
TX TEST
CABLE
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
BNC
“T”
NOTES:
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET
PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE
STATION TEST SET.
TX TEST
CABLE
(SEE FIGURE F-15)
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TO
MPC
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
BNC
“T”
LAN
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
CDMA
LMF
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
NOTE:
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(SEE FIGURE F-16).
3-70
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P64115A18–1
Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs –
Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
IMPORTANT:
WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT
RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
RX TEST
CABLE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
SYNTHE
REF
IN
EXT
TRIG IN
RF OUT
50 Ω
GPIB
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
INPUT 50 Ω
INPUT
50 Ω
10 MHZ
OUT
EXT TRIG
GPIB
BNC
“T”
TX TEST
CABLE
RF OUT
50 Ω
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
BNC
“T”
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
NOTE:
TX TEST
CABLE
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
Agilent E7495A
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TO
MPC
TO PA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
RF
IN
TO “EXT REF IN” –
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
FREQ
MONITOR
RF
OUT
SYNC
MONITOR
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
CDMA
LMF
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Mar 2003
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
3-71
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment calibration helps to ensure accurate BTS
optimization and acceptance testing by assuring that the test equipment
and associated cables do not introduce measurement errors.
NOTE
If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test the BTS
has been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does
not need to be performed.
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated cables and adapters
actually used to interconnect test equipment items and the BTS) has been
calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter that
makes up the calibrated test equipment set has been replaced, the
set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can introduce
measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and
degradation to system performance. Motorola recommends
repeating cable calibration before testing at each BTS site.
NOTE
Calibration of the communications system analyzer (or
equivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the test
equipment after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for
a a minimum of 60 minutes.
Calibration Procedures Included
Automatic
Procedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibration
routine to determine path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)
antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.
After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test
measurement offset file on the LMF computer.
Manual
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not support
the power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If this
instrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibration
is attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, the
LMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroing
power is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the Equipment
Calibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using the
instrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performing
Bay Level Offset calibration.
Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to be
performed prior to automated calibration are included in the Equipment
Calibration section of Appendix F.
3-72
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP
8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers are
provided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, if
needed.
GPIB Addresses
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any
address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options
window GPIB address boxes (Table 3-23 and Table 3-24) must match
the addresses set in the test equipment. Motorola recommends using 1
for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a
communications system analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the
GPIB addresses of the test equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB
Addresses section of Appendix F.
Selecting Test Equipment
Serial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in the
LMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.
The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items are
connected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normal
setup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment is
to be connected remotely via a network connection.
Prerequisites
Be sure the following have been completed before selecting test
equipment:
S Test equipment is turned on.
S GPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correct
using the applicable procedures in Appendix NO TAG.
S LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the
GPIB box.
Selecting Test Equipment
Test equipment may be selected either manually with operator input or
automatically using the LMF autodetect feature.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-73
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before or after the test
equipment is connected. The LMF does not attempt to verify the test
equipment is actually detected when manual selection is specified.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-23 to manually select test equipment.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.
– The LMF Options window appears.
If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).
If it is not selected (black dot showing), click on the Manual Specification button.
Click on the check box(es) corresponding to the test equipment item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses
section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).
Motorola–recommended addresses are:
1 = signal generator
13 = power meter
18 = communications system analyzer
NOTE
When test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a power
meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RF
power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).
Click on Apply.
– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.
NOTE
With manual selection, the LMF does not attempt to detect the test equipment to verify it is connected
and communicating with the LMF.
3-74
Click on Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF
determines which test equipment items are actually communicating with
LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to use the auto-detection
feature.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step
Action
In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.
– The LMF Options window appears.
If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).
If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the Auto–Detection button.
If they are not already displayed in the box labeled GPIB address to search, click in the box and type
in the GPIB addresses for the test equipment to be used, separating each address with commas and no
spaces. (Refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying
and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses.)
NOTE
During the GPIB address search for a test equipment item to perform RF power measurements (that is,
for TX calibration), the LMF will select the first item it finds with the capability to perform the
measurement. If, for example, the address sequence 13,18,1 is included in the GPIB addresses to
search box, the power meter (GPIB address 13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the
address sequence 18,13,1 is included, the LMF will use the communications system analyzer (GPIB
address 18) for power measurements.
Click Apply.
– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.
– A check mark will appear in the applicable Manual Configuration section check boxes for
detected test equipment items.
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-75
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Calibrating Test Equipment
The LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function zeros the power
measurement level of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX
calibration and audit. If both a power meter and an analyzer are
connected (for example, an HP 437 and an HP8921A/600), only the
power meter is zeroed.
NOTE
The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support power
measurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment Calibration
section of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.
Prerequisites
S LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the
GPIB box.
S Test equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60
minutes.
S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 or
Table 3-24)
Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration
n Step
3-76
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment
from the pull–down menu. A Directions window is
displayed.
Follow the directions provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window and
start the calibration process. A status report window is
displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Calibrating Cables Overview
The LMF Cable Calibration function is used to measure the path loss
(in dB) for the TX and RX cables, adapters, directional couplers, and
attenuators that make up the cable configurations used for testing. A
communications system analyzer is used to measure the loss of both the
TX test cable and the RX test cable configurations. LMF cable
calibration consists of the following processes:
1. Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the communications system analyzer. The
short cable, which is used only for the calibration process, is
connected in series with both the TX and RX test cable
configurations when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
test cable configurations to determine the actual loss of the
configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the analyzer
measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
2. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the RX test cable
configuration. The RX test cable configuration normally consists
only of a coax cable with type–N connectors that is long enough to
reach from the BTS RX connector to the test equipment. When the
BTS antenna connectors carry duplexed TX and RX signals, a
directional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an additional
attenuator are also required for the RX test cable configuration.
These additional items must be included in the path loss
measurement.
3. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the TX test cable
configuration. The TX test cable configuration normally consists of
two coax cables with type–N connectors, a directional coupler, a
termination load with sufficient rating to dissipate the BTS output
power, and an additional attenuator, if required by the BTS type. The
total path loss of the TX test configuration must be as required for
the BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is
different from other communications system analyzers because the
required attenuation/load is built into the test set. Because of this,
the Cybertest TX test configuration consists only of the required
length coax cable.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-77
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer
NOTE
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 GHz. A different analyzer type or the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer method (Table 3-27 and
Table 3-28) must be used. Cable calibration values must be
manually entered into the LMF cable loss file if the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. To use the
HP8921A for manual test cable configuration calibration for 800
MHz BTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section of
Appendix F.
Prerequisites
S Test equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60
minutes.
S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 or
Table 3-24).
S Test equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for the
type of test cable configuration to be calibrated.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, or Figure 3-13 and follow the
procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test cable configurations.
Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System Analyzer
n Step
Action
Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Cable
Calibration... in the pull–down menu. A Cable
Calibration window is displayed.
Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels box.
NOTE
Multiple channel numbers must be separated by a comma
with no spaces (for example, 200,800). When two or
more channel numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be
accomplished for other channels, as required, for TX
calibration.
3-78
Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or
RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration picklist.
Click OK, and follow the directions displayed for each
step. A status report window will be displayed with the
results of the cable calibration.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
Refer to Figure 3-23 and follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate
the TX test cable configuration for all BTSs or the RX ATP test cable
configuration for BTSs with duplexed TX/RX using the signal generator
and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-24 and follow the procedure in
Table 3-28 to calibrate the test cable configuration for non–duplexed RX
using the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
TX and Duplexed RX Cable Calibration
Table 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown in
Figure 3-23, detail “A” (top portion of figure).
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for North
American cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”
setup.
Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-23), to measure cable
output at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North American cellular and 1930–1990
MHz for North American PCS) and record the value measured using the detail “B” test setup.
Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)
Example:
Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as–is to ensure test
procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
THIS WILL CONNECT TO THE BTS TX
ANTENNA CONNECTOR DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX ANTENNA
CONNECTORS DURING ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
Signal
Generator
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
20DB 20 W IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR FOR
1.9 GHZ
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL CONNECT TO THE POWER METER OR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX AND RX ATP TESTS.
Mar 2003
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RX TEST CABLE
FOR RX ATP TEST
OR
SECOND TX TEST CABLE
FOR TX CAL AND ATP
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
TX TEST
CABLE
3-79
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Non-Duplexed RX Cable Calibration
Table 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
NOTE
When preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the RX cable calibration must be done
using calibration setup in Figure 3-23 and the procedure in Table 3-27.
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown in
Figure 3-24, detail “A” (top portion of figure).
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for North
American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use the spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”
setup.
Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-24) to measure the
output at the customer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910
MHz band for North American PCS). Record the value measured with the detail “B” test setup.
Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)
Example:
Cal factor = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration
as–is to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
CONNECTION TO THE COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER RF OUTPUT
CONNECTOR DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
Spectrum
Analyzer
CONNECTION TO THE BTS RX ANTENNA
CONNECTOR DURING RX ATP
BULLET
CONNECTOR
IMPORTANT: IF BTS TX/RX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTS
TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA CONNECTOR
AND MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30
DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB
IN–LINE ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-23.
3-80
SHORT TEST
CABLE
RX TEST
CABLE
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for TX and RX test cable configurations are normally
set by accomplishing automatic cable calibration using the LMF and the
applicable test equipment. The LMF stores the measured loss values in
the cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set or changed
manually.
CAUTION
If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF, cable
loss values must be manually entered in the LMF database.
Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration and
reduced site performance.
Prerequisites
S LMF is logged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Cable Loss in the pull–down menus.
– A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the TX Cable Loss tab or the RX Cable Loss tab, as required.
To add a new channel number, perform the following:
3a
– Click on the Add Row button.
3b
– Click in the Channel # or Loss (dBm) column, as required.
3c
– Enter the desired value.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
S If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-81
Test Set Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
If an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss must be
manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration and
audit calculations.
Prerequisites
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S Path loss, in dB, of the TX coupler must be known
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values
Step
Action
Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Coupler Loss... in the pull–down menus.
– A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the TX Coupler Loss tab or the RX Coupler Loss tab, as required
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button is used will be lost when the window is dismissed.
S The In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must be
checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit
functions.
S New or changed values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and logging
in again are not required to cause saved changes to take effect.
3-82
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration
Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of the
optimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normal
equipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correct
transmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet site
performance requirements.
What is BLO Calibration?
Description
BLO calibration is the complete title of what is normally referred to as
“calibration.” Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every
transmit path at the BTS site. The transmit path BLO values determined
during calibration are stored in the LMF calibration data file, and are
subsequently downloaded to each BBX. When transmit path calibration
is performed, receive path BLO values will automatically be set to the
default value in the LMF calibration file and downloaded.
BTS RF Path Descriptions
Transmit (TX) path – A TX path starts at an SCCP shelf BBX
backplane slot, travels through the CIO card, is routed to the Power
Amplifier (PA) trunking module for sector phase shifting, through the
PAs, back through the PA trunking module for sector phase selection,
through the TX bandpass filter (starter frames) or 2:1 TX combiner
(companion frames), through the Transmit & Receive Filter (TRF) or
Duplexer TX/RF Filter (DRF), and ends at the TRF or DRF antenna
connector.
Receive (RX) main path – A main RX path starts at ANTENNAS
connectors 1A, 2A, or 3A and travels through the associated TRF or
DRF, the MPC in SCCP cage slot MPC–1, the CIO card, and terminates
at a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.
Diversity RX path – Diversity RX paths differ for SC4812T Lite starter
(stand–alone) and companion frames. The following describe each type
of path:
S Starter frame diversity RX path – A starter frame diversity RX path
is the same as a main RX path except that it starts at ANTENNAS
connectors 1B, 2B, or 3B, travels through the associated TRF or DRF,
and the MPC card in SCCP cage slot MPC–2 (refer to Table 1-6).
S Companion frame diversity RX path – The companion frame main
RX signal is used for the collocated companion frame diversity RX
signal. A companion frame’s diversity RX path starts at ANTENNAS
connectors 1A, 2A, or 3A in the collocated companion frame. It
travels through the associated TRF or DRF, the MPC in SCCP cage
slot MPC–1, and the CIO card where it is then routed out of the frame
through the RX expansion out connectors (RX EXPANSION 1A, 2A,
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-83
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
or 3A). The signal travels through the inter–frame diversity RX
cables, into the RX expansion in ports (RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or
3B in NO TAG or NO TAG) of the companion frame, through the
Expansion MPC (EMPC) in SCCP cage slot MPC–2, the CIO, and
terminates at a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.
S RFDS sampling paths – Directional couplers for RFDS signal
sampling are integral to the SC4812T Lite transmit and receive paths
in the DRDCs and TRDCs. Cables connect from these directional
couplers to the RFDS input connectors.
Component Verification During Calibration
TX Path Calibration
TX path calibration supports verification of correct BTS installation, RF
cabling installation and performance, functionality of all equipment
installed in the transmit RF chain, and the proper functioning of each
transmit RF path. External test equipment is used to calibrate and audit
the TX paths of the BTS.
RX Path Calibration
RX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTS
systems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibration
data files during the TX calibration process. RX functionality is verified
during Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration to determine BLO:
1. Is required after initial BTS installation.
2. Must be done once each year for an operational BTS site.
3. Is recommended by Motorola for all associated RF paths after
replacing any of the following components:
– BBX card
– SCCP shelf
– CIO card
– CIO–to–PA trunking module RF cable
– PA trunking module
– Power Amplifier
– Trunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cable
– TX filter or TX filter combiner
– TX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cable
– DRDC or TRDC
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (CAL) data
file where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been completed,
these offset values must be downloaded to the BBXs using the LMF
BLO download function. A detailed description of the file organization
and content is provided in the following paragraphs
3-84
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing out a
copy of a bts–#.cal file and referring to it for the following
descriptions.
CAL File Organization
The CAL file is subdivided into three sections called “slot Blocks”.
These are:
1. Slot[1] Block which contains the calibration data for the six primary
BBX slots.
2. Slot[20] Block which contains the calibration data for the redundant
BBX (see Table 3-32).
3. Slot[385] Block which contains the calibration data for the RFDS.
BBX Slot Block Parts
BBX slot Blocks are further subdivided into the parts described in the
following:
Slot Block Header – Each BBX slot Block has a header section (slot
header) which contains:
S A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
S The number of calibration entries in the file – the numBayLevelPts
parameter. The parameter is fixed at 720 entries for SC4812–series
frames. These 720 entries are combined to define the 360 calibration
points of the CAL file.
S The slot Block format parameter.
Slot Block Bay Level Calibration Data – Each BBX slot Block has a
Bay Level Calibration data section (BayLevelCal) which is organized as
a large flat array. The array is organized by branch, SCCP cage BBX
slot, and calibration entries. There are several ways to look at the array
contents. Two different views are provided in the following to illustrate
the significant features of BayLevelCal section content and organization:
S The first view of the array is shown in Table 3-31. This view shows
the three branches of the array, transmit, main receive, and diversity
receive offsets, and the calibration entry ranges which apply to each.
Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch Assignments
Mar 2003
Range
Branch Assignment
C[1]–C[120]
Transmit
C[121]–C[240]
No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point
entries (default only)
C[241]–C[360]
Receive
C[361]–C[480]
No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point
entries (default only)
C[481]–C[600]
Diversity Receive
C[601]–C[720]
No SC4812T Lite BLO cal point
entries (default only)
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-85
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
S The second view of the array is shown in Table 3-32. This view shows
the assignment of calibration entries in each branch to each BBX slot,
carrier, and sectorization. Three sectors are allowed for an SC4812T
Lite frame.
Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX Branch
RX Branch
RX Diversity
Branch
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 6)
1 (Omni)
33–Sector,
S t
1st Carrier
33–Sector,
S t
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812T Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power sett level.)
l l)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX–R1)
1 (Omni)
33–Sector,
S t
1st Carrier
33–Sector,
S t
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812T Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power sett level.)
l l)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
S When referring to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32, it can be
seen that there is one BBX slot per sector with 20 “calibration entries”
per BBX (sector) for each branch. Two calibration entries define a
single “calibration point;” therefore there are ten calibration points in
each branch for each BBX.
– The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies the
CDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. The
second calibration entry (all even entries) is the power set level
(PwrLvlAdj) for that frequency. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is
3-86
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
from 2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
– The ten calibration points for each slot–branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than ten points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequency
calibrated is written into the remainder of the ten points for that
slot–branch.
Example:
C[1]=384 (odd cal entry)
= 1 “calibration point”
C[2]=19102 (even cal entry)
C[3]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[4]=19086
(even cal entry)
= 1 “calibration point”
C[19]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[20]=19086
(even cal entry)
= 1 “calibration point”
In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies
(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).
The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (channel 777) will
be written to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined
by entries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX–1.
Slot Block Temperature Compensation – Each BBX slot Block also
has a temperature compensation data section (TempLevelCal) where
power level compensation factors for temperature variations are stored.
CAL File and BLO Data Download
When BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs after calibration, the data is
downloaded to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TX
calibration data (entries C[1] – C[60]) are sent first. Data for the ten
BBX slot 1 calibration points (entries C[1] – C[20]) are sent initially,
followed by data for the ten BBX slot 2 calibration points (entries C[21]
– C[40]), and so on. The RX calibration data is sent next in BBX slot
sequence, followed by RX Diversity calibration data.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-87
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed to
Figure 3-14 or Figure 3-15 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 (on page 3-17) to interface the LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 (on page 3-26) to start a GUI LMF session.
If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25 (on page 3-76).
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.
For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15, or
Figure 3-16, depending on the communications analyzer being used.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description
The assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TX
ports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. Each
BBX at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specified
respectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIER
parameter in each BBXs CDF file block. The channel frequency and
desired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in the
ChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for the
CARRIER to which the BBX is assigned.
NOTE
Be sure the bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files
loaded on the LMF computer are current. The LMF will obtain
carrier and channel information from these files and insert it into
the appropriate CDMA Test Parameter screen. Failure to have
the most current files from the CBSC can result in incorrect
channel information being used to calibrate the BTS and
unfavorable affects on BTS performance. Carrier and channel
numbers should only be entered manually for special test cases
or as a last resort.
The calibration process attempts to adjust the measured power to within
+0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less
than +1.5 dB.
The TX BLO for the SC 4812T Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.
BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX and
the measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting the
known BBX power output from the power measured at the TX port or
(Measured Power) – (BBX TX Power Output).
Example:
Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBm
Known BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBm
BLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gain
3-88
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
TX Calibration and the LMF
The LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...
selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). The
All Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TX
calibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and perform
TX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TX
calibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TX
audit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA Test
Parameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or All
Cal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features which
are described in the following subsections.
Rate Set Drop–down Pick List
The Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is
selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and
3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the
test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and
2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.
Verify BLO Checkbox
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the
Single–Sided BLO Checkbox
An acceptable range of BLO values for each type of BTS is established
to allow for tolerance variations in all the components of the RF chain.
This acceptable range, 42+5 dB for example, is very wide to
accommodate the redundant BBX in the BTS. This is a much wider
tolerance than necessary for the primary BBXs. Primary BBXs normally
will have BLOs in the lower half of the range. Using the example range,
this would be from 37 to 42 dB. Checking the Single–Sided BLO
checkbox should only be done when calibrating primary BBXs because
it will reduce the acceptable BLO value variations to the lower half of
the range. Because this is a much more stringent tolerance, calibrations
run with Single–Sided BLO are more likely to fail and should only be
attempted by an experienced CFE. Never select Single–Sided BLO
when calibrating a redundant BBX.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-89
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List
The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Pattern
pull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:
S Standard – performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch,
and six traffic channels with IS–97–specified gain. This pattern setting
should be used for all non–in–service calibrations and audits. Using
this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least
one MCC.
S Pilot (default) – performs calibration using only the pilot channel.
This pattern setting should be used for in–service calibrations, and
requires selection of only a BBX.
S CDFPilot – This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performs
calibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain
values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern
setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting
requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
S CDF – This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use
CDF gain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern
setting (pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting
requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
Test Pattern Channels and Gain Settings – The CDMA channels and
their respective digital gain settings used for each test pattern are listed
in Table 3-34.
Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used
Test Pattern
Channel(s)
Gain Setting
Pilot
Pilot channel only
541
Standard
Pilot
117
Synch channel (SCH)
57
Paging (PCH)
114
Traffic (TCH)
80 for each of 6 Walsh codes
used (6*80)
Pilot
Uses CDF–specified pilot
gain
SCH
57
PCH
114
TCH
6*80
Pilot
All channels use
CDF
CDF–specified
ifi d gains
CDF Pilot
CDF
SCH
PCH
TCH (6)
3-90
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
TX Calibration
Mar 2003
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX
OUT connector, first verify no CDMA channels are keyed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling
any circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a high
probability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.
NOTE
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each
SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX
boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test
and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently
being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are
due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF (or NECF) file to verify the
correct BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to
include BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems
Engineering documentation).
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-91
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
The LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentially
identical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired
(Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-35).
Prerequisites
Before running this procedure, be sure that the following have been
done:
S The card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code
and data loads.
S Primary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).
S All BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
S If running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,
MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.
NOTE
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved
since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform BLO calibration on the
TX paths, download BLO values to the BBXs, and perform TX path
audit in one operation.
Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following the
procedure in Table 3-33.
Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to “Test
Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).
For All Cal Audit...
– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–down menus.
A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
For TX Calibration
– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down menus.
A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select
multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
. . . continued on next page
3-92
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X)
from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).
If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.
* IMPORTANT
Single–Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box when calibrating the
redundant BBX.
10
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list (refer
to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).
11
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
12
Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed.
– When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
13
Click OK to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Re–check the test setup and connection and re–run the calibration. If the
calibration fails again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-93
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration
file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the
BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
S BBXs to receive the download are OOS_RAM (yellow).
S TX calibration was successfully completed
Follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.
Table 3-36: Download BLO
n Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download
> BLO from the pull–down menus. A status report
window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is
downloaded.
3-94
Click OK to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration values. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set–up
required for TX calibration is used for TX audit.
NOTE
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download
to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to
performing the calibration audit.
TX Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,
per the steps in Table 3-37.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for
BBXs. All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the TX calibration setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
The card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code load.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).
All BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-95
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
TX Path Audit procedure
After a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO data
in the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to
perform a BTS TX path audit.
Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit
n Step
Action
If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedure
in Table 3-33 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).
Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to
“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).
Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit... from the pull–down menus. A
CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
3-96
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
– Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
– Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
– Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain values
for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six
traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
– Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
10
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process is
completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
11
Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Re–check the test setup and connections and re–run the test. If the tests
fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Create CAL File
The LMF Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
S The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
CAUTION
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can cause
interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manually
edit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If you
manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File
function the edited information will be lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this procedure, the following should be done:
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow)
S BLO has been downloaded to the BBXs
Table 3-38: Create CAL File
Mar 2003
Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs.
– The CAL file will be updated for the selected BBXs only.
Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Create Cal
File from the pull–down menu.
– A status report window will appear and display the
results of the action.
Click the OK button to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-97
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the
CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:
S Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
S Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)
S Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS
User’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on–line
documentation.
RFDS Parameters
The bts–#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the
installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable
parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit the
parameter settings.
S RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
S TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
S MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(SC9600 internal RFDS only)
S Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
S TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
3-98
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file to verify,
view, or modify data. Because the bts–#.cdf file is generated on
a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft
WordPad, will display file content in a more easily–read format
than many simple text editors.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters
Follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to review and/or edit RFDS
parameters.
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
NOTE
Log out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file:
EXAMPLE:
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
Mc1Equip = 0
Mc2Equip = 0
Mc3Equip = 0
Mc4Equip = 0
RfdsEquip = 2
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
TsuEquip = 1
NOTE
The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts–#.cdf file that should have been generated
by the OMC–R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the
RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.
Save changes and/or quit the editor.
Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-6).
If no changes were made to the bts–#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes were
made, continue with Step 5.
NOTE
To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)
when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.
When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts–#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the
MGLI by performing the following:
5a
– To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant
GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf
slot.
5b
– Click on the MGLI.
5c
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull–down menu.
–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.
5d
– When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
5e
– Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).
5f
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull–down menus
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).
–– A status report window shows the status of the download.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-99
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
5g
– Click OK to close the status report window.
5h
– Click on the MGLI.
5i
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down menu.
–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.
5j
– When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During
this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2–3 minutes.
DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.
5k
– Re–seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector
tabs.
5l
– Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS
menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull–down menus.
Any MCCs that were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, downloaded with
data, and re–enabled as follows:
6a
– Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and
clicking on MCCs in the pull–down menu.
6b
– In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull–down menu.
–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.
6c
– Click OK to close the status report window.
6d
– Repeat Step 6a to select the MCCs.
6e
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select Download > Data from the pull–down menu.
(Selected devices do not change colot when data is downoaded.)
– A status report window shows the status of the download.
6f
– Click on OK to close the status report window.
6g
– When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-17.
Click on the RFDS tab.
Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:
8a
– Click on the SUA to select it.
8b
– Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull–down menu.
–– A status report shows the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
. . . continued on next page
3-100
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
– Click OK to close the status report window.
8c
NOTE
If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:
Mar 2003
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify entries in RFDS fields of the bts–#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).
Status the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper
state (INS_ACT (bright green)).
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-101
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
installation of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM
Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts–#.cdf file. The
MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is
the number the subscriber calls.
3-102
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
Access Overload Code
15
Slot Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary Channel A
25
1175
Primary Channel B
25
1175
Secondary Channel A
25
1175
Secondary Channel B
25
1175
Lock Code
999
Security Code
999999
Service Level
N/A
N/A
Station Class Mark
255
IMSI 11 12
99
IMSI MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
MIN Phone Number
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-103
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if an RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
S LMF is logged into the BTS
Follow the procedure in Table 3-42 to set antenna map data for the
RFDS.
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull–down menus.
– A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select
the antenna map to be edited.
Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column
where entry or editing is needed.
Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function
on–line documentation for antenna map examples.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
3-104
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
S LMF is logged into the BTS
NOTE
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the
antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to set RFDS configuration data.
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull–down
menus.
– A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration
tab, as required.
To add a new antenna number, perform the following:
3a
– Click on the Add Row button.
3b
– Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.
3c
– Enter the desired data.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help
function on–line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-105
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths.
TX Path Calibration – For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS
XCVR is keyed at a pre–determined power level and the BTS power
output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured
at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test
equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference
(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the
TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration
offset value.
RX Path Calibration – For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is
keyed at a pre–determined power level and the power input level is
measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level
measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional
coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)
between the RFDS–keyed power level and power level measured at the
BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
RFDS calibration and the CAL file – The TX and RX RFDS
calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]
Block.
TSIC channel frequency – For each RFDS TSIC, the channel
frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the
appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-44.
Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
WARNING
System
Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B)
341 and 682
1.9 GHz
408 and 791
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
Prerequisites
S Test equipment has been selected.
S Test equipment and test cables have been calibrated.
S TX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been
downloaded to the BBXs.
S Test equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.
S Antenna map data has been entered for the site.
S BBXs are OOS–RAM.
3-106
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
RFDS Calibration Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to perform RFDS calibration.
Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration
Step
Action
In the LMF, select the CDMA BTS–xxx tab.
If the BTS Control button is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS
menu bar to select it.
Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration
(refer to Table 1-6 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).
Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull–down menu. An
RFDS Calibration set–up window will be displayed.
In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-44) in the Channel Field box.
S To enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:
– Separate non–sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces;
for example: 247,585,742.
– Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range
separated by a dash and no spaces;
for example: 385–395.
If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.
11
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl
key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s)).
Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list if performing RX
calibration.
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up
window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
12
When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.
13
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
14
Click on the Frame tab.
15
Select the MGLI by clicking on it.
16
Download updated RFDS offset data to the MGLI (see Step 5 in Table 3-39).
10
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-107
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P64115A18–1
Program TSU NAM
The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test
calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
S MGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).
S SUA is powered up and has a code load.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM.
Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure
Step
Action
In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.
Select the SUA by clicking on it.
Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull–down menu.
– A NAM programming window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3-108
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Alarms Testing
68P64115A18–1
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
Alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
SC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.
The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the
MGLI.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. The Alarm Monitor window is accessed
from the BTS menu bar.
The following buttons are included in the Alarm Monitor window:
S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,
Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.
To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button
and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press
the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of
selections) while clicking on the desired levels.
S The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
S The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
S The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
Alarm Testing Set–up
Prepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.
Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 to connect the LMF computer
terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session.
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Alarm Monitor... from the pull–down menu.
– An Alarm Monitor window will open.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
3-109
Alarms Testing
68P64115A18–1
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm
Step
Action
NOTE
– Back–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.
– To prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should be
charged before performing this test.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.
– The LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #23,
BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL
(red) LEDs should light.
– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.
– On the LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.
– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs should
extinguish.
– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.
Minor Alarm
Table 3-49 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minor
alarm.
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.
– The LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.
– The TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.
Set the TCP switch to ON.
– The alarm condition indications should clear.
Before Leaving the Site
If no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,
complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.
3-110
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Chapter 4
Automated Acceptance Test
Procedures
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
68P64115A18–1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
Introduction
The Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers
(CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all BTS subsystem devices
equipped in the CDF using the LMF and the test equipment it supports.
The CFE can choose to save the results of ATP tests to a report file from
which ATP reports are generated for later printing. See the Generating an
ATP Report section in this chapter.
Because test equipment functions during acceptance testing are
controlled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the test equipment
models supported by the LMF can be used.
NOTE
– Before using the LMF, read the Release Notes “Caveats”
section in the LMF Help function on–line documentation
for any applicable information.
– The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors
only.
– DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed for
calibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. If
license–governing bodies require documentation supporting BTS
site compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.
Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS
site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE
must perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):
1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,
and FER tests.
2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) to
determine the applicable test that must be performed.
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward
link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and
TX code domain.
4-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
68P64115A18–1
ATP Test Options
ATP tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
S All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit
elements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, trunking modules, the
LPAs, and passive components including splitters, combiners,
bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.
S All RX: The RX test verifies the performance of the BTS receive
elements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for companion frames),
BBX, MCC, GLI modules, and the passive components including RX
filters and RF cables.
S All TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.
S Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.
ATP Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, be sure the following have been
completed:
S BTS has been optimized (BBXs calibrated and BLOs downloaded)
(Chapter 3)
S The carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out of
service at the CBSC.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
S CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have
correct code and data loads.
Primary CSM and GLI are INS_ACT (bright green).
MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
No BBXs are keyed (transmitting).
BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
Test cables are calibrated.
Test equipment has been selected, warmed up 60 minutes, and
calibrated.
S GPIB is on.
S BTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be
performed.
WARNING
Mar 2003
1. All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for all
ATP tests.
2. Before the FER is run, be sure that one of the following is
done:
– All transmitter connectors are properly terminated
OR
– All LPAs are turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or
equipment damage.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
68P64115A18–1
TX/RX Antenna Connections
Starter (Stand–alone) Frames
Refer to NO TAG or NO TAG for identification of starter frame transmit
and receive antenna connections where measurements are to be taken.
All ATP test equipment connections for starter frames are made at the
ANTENNAS connectors on the RF interface panel.
Companion Frames
TX ATP Antenna Connections – Each companion frame at a site
connects independently to transmit antennas. Test equipment
connections for TX ATPs on each companion frame are made at the
ANTENNAS connectors as on starter frames. Companion frame
ANTENNAS connectors are shown in NO TAG and NO TAG.
Antenna Connections for RX main ATP – Each companion frame at a
site uses independent receive antennas for main RX signals. The main
RX signals are either routed through TRDC RX ANTENNAS
connectors (NO TAG) or duplexed with TX signals through the single
DRDC ANTENNAS connectors (NO TAG).
Antenna Connections for RX diversity ATP – Companion frame
diversity RX signals are obtained from the RX main antenna of the
collocated companion frame. The main RX signals are sent from the
collocated companion frame through inter–frame diversity RX cables to
the RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or 3B connectors of the frame where they
are used for diversity RX (refer to Figure 4-1). Diversity RX ATP test
equipment connections are made at one of two different locations
depending on whether or not the companion frame under test is
connected to a collocated companion frame. Connection points for each
situation are as follows:
S Connected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RX
cables are connected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATP at
the ANTENNAS connectors of the collocated companion frame as
shown in Figure 4-1 and listed in Table 4-1. Be sure MPC is selected
before logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.
4-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
68P64115A18–1
S Disconnected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RX
cables are disconnected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATP
at the RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, or 3B on the frame under
test. Refer to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2. Be sure EMPC is selected
before logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.
Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection Diagram
SC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 1
TO
BBXS
RX MAIN
(3 SECTORS)
RX MAIN
(3)
RX DIVERSITY
(3 SECTORS)
SC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 2
RX EXPANSION
CONNECTORS
RX MAIN
(3)
1B
EMPC
2B
2A
3B
3A
INTER–FRAME
DIVERSITY RX
CABLES
CIO
2A
2A
2B
1A
1B
RX EXPANSION
CONNECTORS
ANTENNAS
CONNECTORS
(TRDC/DRDC)
3A
EMPC
RX EXPANSION
CONNECTORS
2A
MPC
CIO
MPC
1A
3B
3A
3A
ANTENNAS
CONNECTORS
(TRDC/DRDC)
1A
RX EXPANSION
CONNECTORS
1A
RX DIVERSITY
(3 SECTORS)
RX MAIN
(3 SECTORS)
RX DIVERSITY ATP CONNECTION POINTS:
1: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversity
RX cables are connected.
2: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversity
RX cables are disconnected.
3: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversity
RX cables are connected.
4: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversity
RX cables are disconnected.
TO
BBXS
SIGNALS:
RX MAIN
RX DIVERSITY
NOTE: ANTENNAS connectors represent TRDC/DRDC portion of receive path.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
SC4812ETL0045–1
4-5
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
68P64115A18–1
Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,
Inter–frame RX Cables Connected
(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC)
Sector
Connect RX Test Cable to
Collocated Companion Frame
RX or Duplexed TX/RX
ANTENNAS Connector
1A
2A
3A
1A
2A
3A
On
Carrier
Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,
Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected
(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC)
Sector
Connect RX Test Cable to
Frame Under Test
RX EXPANSION Connector
1B
2B
3B
1B
2B
3B
On
Carrier
4-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up
68P64115A18–1
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
WARNING
NOTE
LMF
Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
Communications system analyzer
Signal generator for FER testing (required for all communications
system analyzers for 1X FER)
– Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA
channels keyed.
– At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up
All ATP testing – Follow the steps in Table 4-3 to set up test equipment
for all tests.
Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 and
Figure 3-3).
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.
If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20,
Figure 3-21, or Figure 3-22, as applicable, for the test equipment and antenna duplexing being used, to
connect test equipment for acceptance testing.
NOTE
LMF–based measurements factor in TX test cable loss between the RFMF and test equipment. If
additional attenuation, such as external TX combiners, is inserted in the path, it must be identified to
the LMF by including it in the TX test cable calibration. If this is not possible, include the attenuation
in the TX path by editing cable loss values (refer to Table 3-29). Failure to do this will result in test
inaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures because the additional losses would not be
compensated for in the test measurements.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-7
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up
68P64115A18–1
Companion frame All TX/RX, All RX, and FER for Diversity RX –
When performing All TX/RX, All RX, or FER ATP for companion
frame diversity RX, perform the additional test equipment set–up
procedures in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion Frames
Step
Action
If the LMF is logged into the BTS, log out of the BTS.
If the inter–frame diversity RX cabling to a collocated companion frame is:
S Connected to the companion frame under test, proceed to step 3.
S Disconnected from the companion frame under test, proceed to step 7.
For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables connected, click on the LMF Login tab.
In the Equipage Information box, select MPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.
Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-1.
Proceed to step 10.
For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables disconnected, click on the LMF Login
tab.
In the Equipage Information box, select EMPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.
Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2.
10
Click on the LMF BTS# tab, and return to the procedure for the ATP being performed.
4-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
68P64115A18–1
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
All–inclusive Tests
General – The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the
LMF GUI environment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviated
ATPs because they execute various combinations of individual
acceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification of
multiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for
individual test set up and initiation.
Abbreviated ATP Options – There are three abbreviated acceptance
tests which evaluate different performance aspects of the BTS. This
allows the CFE to select testing to meet the specific requirements for
individual maintenance and performance verification situations. The
following summarizes the coverage of each abbreviated test:
S All TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBXs.
S All TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of the
following individual tests:
– TX Mask Test
– Rho Test
– Pilot Time Offset Test
– Code Domain Power Test
S All RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs and
BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:
– FER Test
Abbreviated ATP Procedures – Procedures to accomplish each type of
abbreviated ATP are included in the following subsections.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-9
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
68P64115A18–1
All TX/RX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-5 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit and receive test.
Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests as described in Table 4-3.
If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform the
additional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than the
one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the new
Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.
Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select
multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
NOTE
If a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do not
select BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this
configuration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper
test signal gain.
Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600 3=9600 1X) from the drop–down list.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,
all channel elements are specified.
Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:
– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
NOTE
The channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.
. . . continued on next page
4-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
68P64115A18–1
Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
10
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance tests from the drop–down list
(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level
Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3).
11
Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.
12
NOTE
When testing diversity RX paths on companion frames, be sure to follow the RX test cable connection
information in Table 4-1 or Table 4-2, as applicable, during this step.
Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begin
testing.
– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
13
Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-11
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
68P64115A18–1
All TX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-6 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit test.
Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.
Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX ATP... from the pull–down menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select
multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the drop–down
list.
NOTE
The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance test from the drop–down list
(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level
Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3).
Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.
Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begin
testing.
– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
10
Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All RX ATP Test
Follow the procedure in Table 4-7 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive receive test.
Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.
. . . continued on next page
4-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
Mar 2003
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
68P64115A18–1
Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform the
additional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than the
one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the new
Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.
Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select
multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
NOTE
If a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do not
select BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this
configuration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper
test signal gain.
Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
drop–down list.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,
all channel elements are specified.
Use one of the following methods to enter more than one channel element:
– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
NOTE
The channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.
10
Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2003
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.x
DRAFT
4-13
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2003:03:17 15:19:40-06:00
Modify Date                     : 2003:04:11 11:43:51-05:00
Page Count                      : 199
Creation Date                   : 2003:03:17 21:19:40Z
Mod Date                        : 2003:03:17 21:19:40Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Author                          : Win32 user
Metadata Date                   : 2003:03:17 21:19:40Z
Creator                         : Win32 user
Title                           : TLite
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHET5DJ1

Navigation menu